yours sincerely maruti suzuki india limited (pankaj narula · pankaj narula maruti suzuki india...

Dear Sir/Madam,

Thank you for choosing a Maruti Suzuki vehicle.

I hope our dealership team took good care while delivering the vehicle to you.

Your vehicle is equipped with state-of-the-art technologies. To get the best performance from your vehicle (and ensure it is trouble-free), kindly get your vehicle serviced periodically, as per the maintenance schedule in your Owner's Manual. Please make sure the service is done at a Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results.

For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized dealers for assistance. Kindly appreciate that any tampering of wiring harness to fit accessories may cause the vehicle to malfunction.

Thank you once again for choosing a Maruti Suzuki vehicle.

I wish you many years of safe and happy driving.

Pankaj Narula

MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITEDPalam Gurgaon Road, Gurgaon-122015www.marutisuzuki.com

Executive Director (Service)

Yours sincerely

(Pankaj Narula)

VIN:MODEL: OWNER

NAME & ADDRESS

VARIANT:

COLOUR:

ENGINE NO.: CONTACT NO.

KEY NO.: E-mail ID:

INVOICE DATE:SELLINGDEALER NAME & CODE

ODOMETER READING KM

REGISTRATION NO.:

BATTERY MAKE:DEALERSHOWROOMADDRESS & CONTACT NO. (STAMP)

BATTERY NO.:

BATTERY BATCH

TYRE MAKE BATCH CODE

Front Right

CONTACT NO. FOR SERVICE APPOINTMENT& SUPPORT

Front Left

Rear Right

Rear Left

Spare

For any assistance with regard to our product, please contact General Manager/Works Manager at any of our Dealer or Authorised ServiceStation. For additional enquiry you may contact our Regional Office or Service Department. The addresses and phone numbers are given inService Network section of this Manual / Service Network booklet.

82PH0-74E

DATE OFSERVICE

KIND OFSERVICE

MILEAGE(KM)

DESCRIPTION OF JOB NAME OF SERVICING DEALER/MASS

JOB CARD NO. MECHANICSSIGNATURE

MAINTENANCE SERVICE RECORDS

F: .... FREE SERVICE, P:.... PAID SERVICE, W:.... WARRANTY JOB, A:.... ACCIDENTAL JOB

0-1

82PH0-74E

FOREWORDThis manual is an essential part of yourvehicle and should remain with the vehiclewhen resold or otherwise transferred to anew owner or operator. Please read thismanual carefully before operating yournew MARUTI SUZUKI and review themanual from time to time. It containsimportant information on safety, operationand maintenance. You are invited to availthe three Free Inspection Services asdescribed in the manual. Three freeinspection coupons are attached to thismanual. Please show this manual to yourdealer while you take your MARUTISUZUKI for any Service.To prolong the life of your vehicle andreduce maintenance cost, the periodicmaintenance must be carried out accord-ing to “PERIODIC MAINTENANCESCHEDULE” described in “INSPECTIONAND MAINTENANCE” section of this man-ual. It is essential for preventing troubleand accidents to ensure your satisfactionand safety.Daily inspection and care as per “DAILYINSPECTION CHECKLIST” described inthe “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”section of this manual is essential for pro-longing the life of the vehicle and for safedriving.

MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED believesin conservation and protection of Earth’snatural resources.To that end, we encourage every vehicleowner to recycle, trade-in or properly dis-pose of, as appropriate, used Engine Oil,coolant and other fluids, batteries andtyres etc.

MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED

All information in this manual is basedon the latest product information avail-able at the time of publication. Due toimprovements or other changes, theremay be discrepancies between informa-tion in this manual and your vehicle.MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITEDreserves the right to make productionchanges at any time, without notice andwithout incurring any obligation tomake the same or similar changes tovehicles previously built or sold.

This vehicle may not comply withstandards or regulations of othercountries. Before attempting to regis-ter this vehicle in any other country,check all applicable regulations andmake any necessary modifications.

0-2

82PH0-74E

IMPORTANTWARNING/ CAUTION/NOTICE/

NOTEPlease read this manual and follow itsinstructions carefully. To emphasize spe-cial information, the symbol and the wordsWARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE andNOTE have special meanings. Pay particu-lar attention to messages highlighted bythese signal words:

NOTE:Indicates special information to makemaintenance easier or instructions clearer.

75F135

The circle with a slash in this manualmeans “Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this hap-pen”.

MODIFICATION WARN-ING

WARNINGIndicates a potential hazard thatcould result in death or seriousinjury.

CAUTIONIndicates a potential hazard thatcould result in minor or moderateinjury.

NOTICEIndicates a potential hazard thatcould result in vehicle damage.

WARNINGDo not modify your vehicle. Modifica-tion could adversely affect safety,handling, performance, or durabilityand may violate governmental regula-tions. In addition, damage or perfor-mance problems resulting frommodification may not be coveredunder warranty.

NOTICEImproper installation of mobile com-munication equipment such as cellu-lar telephones, CB (Citizen’s Band)radios or any other wireless transmit-ters may cause electronic interfer-ence with your vehicle’s ignitionsystem, resulting in vehicle perfor-mance problems. Consult yourauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshopor qualified service technician foradvice.

NOTICESevere damage may be caused bythe use of either poor quality fueland/or lubricants not recommendedby MARUTI SUZUKI.

0-3

82PH0-74E

WARRANTY POLICY

Maruti Suzuki India Limited (hereinafter called “Maruti Suzuki”),warrants that each new Maruti Suzuki vehicle distributed in Indiaby Maruti Suzuki and sold by an authorised Maruti Suzuki dealerwill be free, under normal use and service, from any defects inmaterial and workmanship at the time of manufacture SUBJECTTO THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS:

(1) Qualification:To qualify for this warranty the vehicle must be delivered by aMaruti Suzuki authorised dealer and set-up, and serviced by aMaruti Suzuki authorised dealer / service station.

(2) Term:The term of the warranty shall be twenty-four (24) months or40,000 kilometers (whichever occurs first) from the date ofinvoice to the first owner.

(3) Maruti Suzuki Warranty Obligation:If any defect(s) should be found in a Maruti Suzuki vehicle withinthe term stipulated above, Maruti Suzuki’s only obligation is torepair or replace at its sole discretion any part shown to be defec-tive, with a new part or the equivalent at no cost to the owner forparts or labour, when Maruti Suzuki acknowledges that such adefect is attributable to faulty material or workmanship at the timeof manufacture. The owner is responsible for any repair or replace-ments which are not covered by this warranty.

(4) Limitation:This warranty shall not apply to:

(a) Normal maintenance service required other than the threefree services, including without limitation, oil and fluidchanges, headlight aiming, fastener retightening, wheel bal-ancing, wheel alignment and tyre rotation, cleaning of injec-tors, adjustments of clutch and valve clearance.

(b) The replacement of normal wear parts including without lim-itation, bulbs, tyres and tubes, spark plugs, belts, hoses, fil-ters, wiper blades, brushes, contact points, fuses, clutchdisc, brake shoes, brake pads, cable and all rubber parts(except oil seal and glass run).

(c) Any vehicle which has been used for competition or racing.(d) Any repairs or replacement required as a result of accidents

or collision.(e) Any defects caused by misuse, negligence, abnormal use or

insufficient care.(f) Any vehicle which has been modified or altered, including

without limitation, the installation of performance accesso-ries.

(g) Any vehicle on which parts or accessories not approved byMaruti Suzuki have been used.

(h) Any vehicle which has not been operated in accordance withthe operating instructions in this Owner’s Manual and Ser-vice Booklet.

(i) Any vehicle which has not received, during the warranty term,the service inspections prescribed in this Owner’s Manualand Service Booklet.

(j) Any vehicle which has been assembled, disassembled,adjusted or repaired by other than an Maruti Suzuki autho-rised dealer/service station.

(k) Any vehicle which has been used for purposes other thanwhat it was designed for.

(l) Any damage or deterioration caused by industrial pollutionand bird droppings.

0-4

82PH0-74E

(m) Insignificant defects which do not affect the function of thevehicle including without limitation, sound, vibration and fluidseep.

(n) Any natural wear and tear including without limitation, agingetc.

(o) Installation and usage of domestic LPG gas/LPG Cylinder.(p) V-belts, hoses and gas leaks.(q) Any vehicle retrofitted with LPG/CNG kits.

(5) Extent of Warranty:This warranty is the entire written warranty given by Maruti Suzukifor Maruti Suzuki vehicles and no dealer or its or his agent oremployee is authorised to extend or enlarge this warranty and nodealer or its or his agent or employee is authorised to make anyoral warranty on Maruti Suzuki’s behalf.Maruti Suzuki reserves the right to add any improvements orchange the design of any model at any time with no obligation tomake the same changes on units previously sold.

(6) Warranty Service:To obtain warranty service, the complete vehicle must be pre-sented at the owner’s expenses to any authorised Maruti Suzukiworkshop.

(7) Owner’s Warranty Responsibilities:It is responsibility of each owner to:

– Make certain that the PDl card was completed at the time ofdelivery of the vehicle;

– Have performed, at his own expenses, by an Maruti Suzukiauthorised dealer/service station all the service inspectionsspecified in the Maruti Suzuki “Owner’s Manual and ServiceBooklet and maintain adequate proof that such serviceinspections have been performed.

– Make certain that the Maruti Suzuki authorised dealer/ser-vice station performing the service inspection has certifiedthe work on the “Maintenance Service Record” page in the“Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet and

– Present the Maruti Suzuki “Owner’s Manual and ServiceBooklet to the authorised Maruti Suzuki dealer wheneverrequesting service inspections or warranty service.

If the “Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet should be lost ordestroyed the owner should consult the authorised Maruti Suzukidealer from whom the vehicle was purchased for instructions con-cerning replacement of the “Owner’s Manual and Service Book-let”.

(8) Disclaimer of Consequential Damage:Maruti Suzuki assumes no responsibility for loss of vehicle, loss oftime, inconvenience or any other indirect incidental or consequen-tial damage resulting from the vehicle not being available to theowner because of any defect covered by this warranty.

(9) Change of OwnerEven if ownership of the vehicle changes, the remaining warrantyperiod is effective for the new owner.

0-5

82PH0-74E

EMISSION WARRANTY POLICY

Maruti Suzuki offers the Emission Warranty on all Maruti Suzukivehicles (apart from the Regular Warranty and will run parallel tothe regular product warranty) only in four metropolitan cities (NewDelhi, Kolkata, Mumbai and Chennai) with effect from July 1st,2001.

Terms:The Emission Warranty will be applicable for 80,000 kms or 3years (Whichever comes earlier) from the date of invoice to thefirst owner. The remaining warranty terms will be valid in case ofany change in ownership provided the production of all valid docu-ments.

Conditions:1. Under Emission Warranty, Warranty claims will be admitted for

a prima facie examination, in case vehicle fails to meet theEmission Standard as specified in sub rule (2) of rule no. 115of Central Motor Vehicles Rules (CMVR), 1989.

2. The warranty claims will only be accepted after examinationcarried out by Maruti Suzuki or it’s dealer which leads to firmconclusions that thea) Original settings have not been tampered in any case. b) Part (as given in Annexure - A) has a manufacturing defect. c) Vehicle is unable to meet the Emission Standards (as given

in 1.), inspite of the vehicle having been maintained andused in accordance with the instructions as specified inOwner’s Manual and Service Booklet and the used fuel anddifferent oils (Engine oil, Transmission oil, Brake oil etc.) arealso as per specification.

3. The method of examination for deciding the warranty of theparts will be at the sole discretion of Maruti Suzuki and it’sdealer and results of the examination will be final and binding.If after examination, the warrantable condition is not estab-lished, Maruti Suzuki and it’s dealer has the right to charge all,or part of the cost of such examination.

4. Under Emission Warranty, the parts (as given in Annexure - A)will be changed free of cost, but the consumables will becharged as per actual.

5. If the part covered under Emission Warranty or the associatedparts, are not independently replaceable, on account of thesebeing integral parts of a complete assembly, Maruti Suzuki andit’s dealer will have the sole discretion to replace either theentire assembly or by using some of the parts of the systemthrough suitable repairs or modifications.

6. Any consequential repairs or replacement of parts which maybe found necessary to establish compliance of Emission War-ranty, will not be considered under warranty, unless the same isunder product warranty. The consumable will be charged asper actual under such repair or replacement.

7. Maruti Suzuki will not be responsible for the cost of transporta-tion of the vehicle to the nearest Maruti Suzuki dealer work-shop or any loss due to non-availability of the vehicle duringthe period of lodging of a warranty claim and examination and/or repair by Maruti Suzuki dealer.

8. Maruti Suzuki will not be responsible for any penalty that maybe charged by statutory authorities on account of failure tocomply with the EMISSION STANDARDS.

9. Emission Warranty will not be affected on the change of owner,provided all the documents are available.

0-6

82PH0-74E

10.All maintenance actions (as specified in the Owner’s Manualand Service Booklet) need to be followed and recorded in themanual for emission warranty.

11.The customer needs to produce the PUC (Pollution UnderControl) certificate valid for the period preceding the test duringwhich the failure is discovered. The receipts (for the mainte-nance of the vehicle as per specification in Owner’s Manualand Service Booklet from the date of original purchase of thevehicle) will also be required.

Conditions under which the Emission Warranty is notAPPLICABLE1. In the absence of valid PUC certificate.

2. Vehicle not serviced from Maruti Suzuki authorised workshopas per the schedule specified in this Owner’s Manual and Ser-vice Booklet.

3. Vehicle subjected to abnormal use (accident, motor race, ral-lies or for the purpose of establishing the records etc).

4. Use of non MGP (Maruti Genuine Part).

5. Vehicle that has been tampered with.6. Tampering with odometer so that the actual kilometer reading

can not be determined.

7. Use of adulterated fuel and/or unspecified oils (Engine oil,Transmission oil and Brake oil etc).

Annexure - AList of parts covered under Emission Warranty

1. Fuel Injection Assembly, Pressure Regulator, Throttle BodyAssembly

2. Electronic Control Module (ECM).3. Intake Manifold.4. EGR valve.5. Ignition Coil.6. Canister Assembly.7. Vapour Liquid Seperator.8. Fuel Tank and Filler Cap.9. PCV (Positive Crankcase Ventilation) Valve.

10. Oil Filler Cap.11. Catalytic Convertor.12. Exhaust Manifold.13. All Fuel Injection System related SENSORS.14. High Pressure Fuel Pump.15. Glow Plug.16. Glow Plug Controller.

82PH0-74E

TABLE OF CONTENTS FUEL RECOMMENDATION 1

BEFORE DRIVING 2

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 3

DRIVING TIPS 4

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 5

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING 6

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 7

EMERGENCY SERVICE 8

APPEARANCE CARE 9

GENERAL INFORMATION 10

SPECIFICATIONS 11

SERVICE NETWORK 12

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

1

82PH0-74E

65D394

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONFuel Recommendation ........................................................ 1-1

1-1

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

82PH0-74E

Fuel RecommendationYou must use diesel fuel with Cetane Num-ber (CN) higher than 51 and sulphur con-tent less than 350 ppm (parts per million).MARUTI SUZUKI recommends to use thediesel fuel conformable to EN590. Do notuse marine diesel fuel, heating oils and soforth.

NOTICEThe fuel tank has an air space toallow for fuel expansion in hotweather. If you continue to add fuelafter the filler nozzle has automati-cally shut off or an initial blowbackoccurs, the air chamber will becomefull. Exposure to heat when fullyfuelled in this manner will result inleakage due to fuel expansion. Toprevent such fuel leakage, stop fillingafter the filler nozzle has automati-cally shut off, or when using an alter-native non-automatic system, initialvent blowback occurs.

NOTICEBe careful not to spill fuel containingalcohol while refueling. If fuel isspilled on the vehicle body, wipe it upimmediately. Fuels containing alco-hol can cause paint damage, which isnot covered under the New VehicleWarranty.

BEFORE DRIVING

2

82PH0-74E

60MHM2T001

BEFORE DRIVINGKeys ...................................................................................... 2-1Door Locks .......................................................................... 2-2Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller/Keyless Entry System Transmitter (if equipped) ............. 2-6Security System (if equipped) ............................................ 2-15Windows .............................................................................. 2-18Mirrors .................................................................................. 2-22Front Seats .......................................................................... 2-23Rear Seats ............................................................................ 2-25Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems ........................... 2-28Supplemental Restraint System (air bags) ....................... 2-41Instrument Cluster .............................................................. 2-48Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-49Tachometer .......................................................................... 2-49Fuel Gauge ........................................................................... 2-49Temperature Gauge ............................................................ 2-50Brightness Control .............................................................. 2-50Multi-Colour Illumination Display ....................................... 2-51Information Display ............................................................. 2-51Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 2-61Lighting Control Lever ........................................................ 2-68Front Fog Light Switch (if equipped) ................................ 2-72Headlight Leveling Switch .................................................. 2-73Turn Signal Control Lever .................................................. 2-73Hazard Warning Switch ...................................................... 2-74Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever ................................ 2-75Tilt Steering Lock Lever ..................................................... 2-78Horn ...................................................................................... 2-79Heated Rear Window Switch (if equipped) ....................... 2-79

2-1

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Keys

54G489

Your vehicle comes with a pair of identicalkeys. Keep the spare key in a safe place.One key can open all of the locks on thevehicle.The key identification number is stampedon a metal tag provided with the keys or onthe keys. Keep the tag (if equipped) in asafe place. If you lose your keys, you willneed this number to have new keys made.Write the number below for your future ref-erence.

Immobilizer System This system is designed to help preventvehicle theft by electronically disabling theengine starting system.The engine can be started only with yourvehicle’s original immobilizer ignition keyor keyless push start system remote con-troller which has an electronic identificationcode programmed into it. The key orremote controller communicates the identi-fication code to the vehicle when the igni-tion switch is turned to the “ON” position orthe engine switch is pressed to change theignition mode to “ON”. If you need to makespare keys or remote controllers, see yourauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop. Thevehicle must be programmed with the cor-rect identification code for the spare. A keymade by an ordinary locksmith will notwork.

65D239

If the immobilizer system light blinks whenthe ignition switch is in the “ON” position orthe ignition mode is “ON”, the engine willnot start.

For vehicles without keyless push startsystemIf this light blinks, turn the ignition switch tothe “LOCK” position, then turn it back tothe “ON” position.If the light still blinks after the ignitionswitch is turned back to the “ON” position,there may be something wrong with yourkey or with the immobilizer system. Askyour authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop tohave the system inspected.

For vehicles with keyless push startsystemIf this light blinks, change the ignition modeto “LOCK” (OFF), then change back to“ON”. Also refer to “If the PUSH indicatorlight blinks and the engine cannot bestarted” in “Starting the Engine (Vehiclewith Keyless Push Start System)” in the“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.If the light still blinks after the ignition modeis changed back to “ON”, there may besomething wrong with your key or with theimmobilizer system. Ask your authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop to have the sys-tem inspected.The immobilizer system light may alsoblink if the remote controller is not in thevehicle when you close the door or attemptto start the engine.

KEY NUMBER:

EXAMPLE

2-2

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

NOTE:• If you lose your immobilizer ignition key

or remote controller, see your authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop as soon as pos-sible to have the lost one deactivated,then have the new key or remote con-troller made by them.

• If you own other vehicles with immobi-lizer keys, keep those keys away fromthe ignition switch or the engine switchwhen using your vehicle, or the enginemay not start because they may interferewith your vehicle’s immobilizer system.

• If you attach any metal objects to theimmobilizer key or remote controller, itmay not start the engine.

Ignition Key ReminderA buzzer sounds intermittently to remindyou to remove the ignition key if it is in theignition switch when the driver’s door isopened.

Door LocksSide Door LocksDriver’s door

76MH0A001

(1) LOCK(2) UNLOCK(3) Front(4) Rear

To lock a front door from outside the vehi-cle:• Insert the key and turn the top of the key

toward the front of the vehicle, or• Turn the inside lock knob forward, then

pull and hold the door handle as youclose the door.

To unlock a driver’s door from outside thevehicle, insert the key and turn the top ofthe key toward the rear of the vehicle.

NOTICEThe immobilizer key and remote con-troller are sensitive electronic instru-ments. To avoid damaging them:• Do not expose them to impacts,

moisture or high temperature suchas on the dashboard under directsunlight.

• Keep them away from magneticobjects.

(1)

(2) (3)

(4)

2-3

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

82PH02001

(1) LOCK(2) UNLOCK

To lock a door from inside the vehicle, turnthe lock knob forward. Turn the lock knobrearward to unlock the door.To lock a rear door from outside the vehi-cle, turn the inside lock knob forward andclose the door. You do not need to pull andhold the door handle as you close the door.

NOTE:Be sure to hold the door handle when youclose the front door to lock it, or the doorwill not lock.

Central Door Locking SystemDriver’s door

76MH0A002

(1) LOCK(2) UNLOCK(3) Front(4) Rear

You can lock and unlock all doors (includ-ing the tailgate) simultaneously by usingthe key in the driver’s door lock.To lock all doors simultaneously, insert thekey in the driver’s door lock and turn thetop of the key toward the front of the vehi-cle once.To unlock all doors simultaneously, insertthe key in a driver’s door lock and turn thetop of the key towards the rear of the vehi-cle twice.

NOTE:You can switch the function that unlocks alldoors from twice operations to once opera-tion, and vice versa, via the setting modeof the information display. For details onhow to use the information display, refer to“Information Display” in this section.

To unlock the driver’s door only, insert thekey in the door lock and turn the top of thekey towards the rear of the vehicle once.

82PH02002

(1) LOCK(2) UNLOCK

You can also lock or unlock all doors frominside by depressing the front or rear of theswitch respectively on the drive side.

EXAMPLE

RL

01

(1)(2)

(3)

(2) (1)

(4)

EXAMPLE

AUTO

(1)(2)

EXAMPLE

2-4

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

NOTE:• You can also lock or unlock all doors by

operating the transmitter or remote con-troller. Refer to “Keyless Push Start Sys-tem Remote Controller/Keyless EntrySystem Transmitter” in this section.

• If your vehicle is equipped with the key-less push start system, you can also lockor unlock all doors by pushing therequest switch. Refer to “Keyless PushStart System Remote Controller/Key-less Entry System Transmitter” in thissection.

NOTE:• All doors are automatically unlocked

when you turn the ignition switch to the“LOCK” position and pull out the key, orpress the engine switch to change theignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF).

• All doors are automatically locked forsafety when the vehicle speed reaches15 km/h.

• You can change the automatic locking orunlocking function mentioned above viathe setting mode of the information dis-play. For details on how to use the infor-mation display, refer to “InformationDisplay” in this section.

Child-Proof Locks (rear door)

76MH0A021

(1) Lock positon(2) Unlock position

Each of the rear doors is equipped with achild-proof lock which can be used to helpprevent unwanted opening of the doorfrom inside the vehicle. When the locklever is in the lock position (1), the reardoor can only be opened from outside.When the lock lever is in the unlock posi-tion (2), the rear door can be opened frominside or outside.

Tailgate

Type 1

82PH02003

(1) Tailgate unlatch switch(2) Request switch (if equipped)

Vehicle with keyless entry systemYou can lock and unlock the tailgate byusing the driver’s door lock key.

WARNINGBe sure to place the child-proof lockin the lock position whenever chil-dren are seated in the rear.

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE WARNINGAlways make sure that the tailgate isclosed and latched securely. Com-pletely closing the tailgate helps pre-vent occupants from being thrownfrom the vehicle in the event of anaccident. Completely closing it alsohelps to keep the exhaust gases fromentering the vehicle.

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

2-5

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

To open the tailgate, push and hold the tail-gate unlatch switch (1) and lift the tailgate.(Vehicle with keyless push start sys-tem)You can lock or unlock the tailgate bypushing the request switch (2), when thekeyless push start system remote control-ler is within the switch’s operating range.For details refer to “Keyless Push StartSystem Remote Controller/Keyless EntrySystem Transmitter” in this section.To open the tailgate push the tail gateunlatch switch (1) and lift the tail gate toopen the trunk lid.The tail gate unlatch switch (1) operatesonly to open the tail gate. When all the doors are closed and if thekeyless push start remote controller is leftin the trunk, the tail gate will be automati-cally unlatched.NOTE:When the tailgate is closed incompletely,follow the procedure below:1) Push the tailgate unlatch switch (1) and

open the tailgate.2) After a few seconds, close the tailgate.3) Make sure that the tailgate is closed

completely.If you cannot unlatch the tailgate by push-ing the unlatch switch (1) due to a dis-charged battery or malfunction, follow theprocedures below to unlatch the tailgatefrom inside the vehicle.

1) Remove the luggage compartmentcover (if equipped) and fold the rearseat forward for easier access. Refer to“Folding Rear Seats” section for detailson how to fold the rear seat forward.

82PH02030

2) Push open the tailgate from inside bypushing up on the emergency lever (3)using a flat blade screwdriver or thejack handle. The tailgate will be latchedagain by closing the tailgate simply.

If the tailgate cannot be unlatched by push-ing the unlatch switch (1), have the vehicleinspected by your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.

Type 2

82PH02004

To open the tailgate, insert the key andturn it clockwise to unlatch and lift the tail-gate.

(3)

EXAMPLE

CAUTION• To avoid injury, do not use your fin-

ger to push the emergency lever.• Make sure there is no one near the

tailgate when pushing open the tail-gate from inside the vehicle.

NOTICEDo not use the key to lift up the tail-gate, or the key may break off in thelock.

EXAMPLE

2-6

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

68KH003

You can also unlatch the tailgate by pullingthe release lever located on the outboardside of the driver’s seat.

Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller/Keyless Entry System Transmitter (if equipped)

82PH02035

Your vehicle is equipped with either a key-less push start system remote controller(Type A) or a keyless entry system trans-mitter (Type B). The remote controller hasa keyless entry system and a keyless pushstart system. The transmitter has only akeyless entry system. For details, refer tothe following explanations.

Type A Type B

WARNINGRadio waves from the keyless pushstart system antenna(s) may interferewith operation of electrical medicalequipment such as pacemakers. Fail-ure to take the precautions listedbelow can increase the risk of severeinjury or death due to radio waveinterference.• Anyone who uses electrical medi-

cal equipment such as a pace-maker should consult the medicalequipment supplier or their medicaladvisor about whether radio wavesfrom the antenna(s) can interferewith the medical equipment.

• If radio wave interference is a con-cern, then contact your authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop.

2-7

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller (Type A)The remote controller enables the follow-ing operations:• You can lock or unlock the doors by

operating the lock/unlock buttons on theremote controller. Refer to the explana-tion in this section.

• You can lock or unlock the doors bypushing the request switch. For details,refer to the explanation in this section.

• You can start the engine without usingan ignition key. For details, refer to“Engine Switch” in the “OPERATINGYOUR VEHICLE” section.

82PH02034

(1) Lock button(2) Unlock button

You can lock or unlock all doors (includingthe tailgate) simultaneously by operatingthe remote controller near the vehicle.

Central door locking system• To lock all doors, push the lock button (1)

once.• To unlock only the driver’s door, push the

unlock button (2) once.• To unlock other doors, push the unlock

button (2) once again.


The turn signal lights will flash once andthe siren will sound once when the doorsare locked.

When the doors are unlocked:• The turn signal lights will flash twice and

the siren will sound twice.• If the interior light switch is in the door

position, the interior light will turn on forabout 15 seconds and then fade out. Ifyou press the engine switch during thistime, the light will start to fade out imme-diately.

Be sure the doors are locked after youoperate the lock button (1). If no door is opened within about 30 sec-onds after the unlock button (2) is oper-ated, the doors will automatically lockagain.

NOTE:• If you lock the doors using the remote

controller when the engine hood is open,the siren will sound 3 times to remindyou.

• If the security system was triggered dueto an unauthorized entry into the vehicleand then you unlock the doors using theremote controller, the siren will sound 4times to remind you. If this happens,check whether your vehicle has beenbroken into while you were away from it.

• If you push both the lock button (1) andunlock button (2) simultaneously, thenyou push any one of the buttons within 5seconds, the siren will not sound. How-ever, If you push one of the buttons twicewithin 5 seconds, or push one of the but-tons 5 seconds later, the siren willsound.

• You can set whether the siren soundswhen locking or unlocking the door(s) viathe setting mode of the information dis-play. For details on how to use the infor-mation display, refer to “InformationDisplay” in this section.

(1)

(2)

2-8

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

NOTE:• The maximum operating distance of the

remote controller is about 5 m (16 ft.),but this can vary depending on the sur-roundings, especially near other trans-mitting devices such as radio towers orCB (Citizen’s Band) radios.

• The door locks cannot be operated withthe remote controller if the ignition modeis other than the “LOCK”(OFF).

• When any door is open, if you push thelock button on the remote controller, theexterior buzzer will sound and doorscannot be locked.

• If you lose one of the remote controllers,ask your authorised Maruti Suzuki work-shop as soon as possible for a replace-ment. Be sure to have your dealerprogram the new remote controller codein your vehicle’s memory so that the oldcode is erased.

Panic alarm functionThis function is to get the attention of oth-ers and also helps in locating the vehicle‘‘. Push both of the lock button (1) and unlockbutton (2) for more than 3 seconds. Theturn signal lights will blink for about 27.5seconds. Also, the siren will sound forabout 27.5 seconds at the same time.To cancel the panic alarm, press any but-ton (lock or unlock). You can also changethe ignition mode to “ON” to cancel thepanic alarm.

NOTE:The panic alarm function will not activatewhen the ignition mode is “ACC” or “ON”.

Keyless unlocking/locking using therequest switches

82PH02011

When the remote controller is within theoperating range described in this section,you can lock or unlock the doors (includingthe tailgate) by pushing the request switch(1) on the driver’s door handle, front pas-senger’s door handle or tailgate.To lock all doors when all doors areunlocked:• To lock all doors, push one of the

request switches once.The turn signal lights will flash once andthe siren will sound once when the doorsare locked.

To unlock a door or all doors:• Push one of the request switches once

to unlock only one door.• Push one of the request switches twice

to unlock all doors.


When the doors are unlocked:• The turn signal lights will flash twice and

the siren will sound twice.• If the interior light switch is in the door

position, the interior light will turn on forabout 15 seconds and then fade out. Ifyou press the engine switch during thistime, the light will start to fade out imme-diately.

Be sure the doors are locked after youoperate the request switch to lock thedoors.

NOTE:• If you lock the doors using the request

switch or the lock switch on the keylesspush start system remote controllerwhen the engine hood is open, the sirenwill sound 3 times to remind you.

(1)

EXAMPLE

2-9

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

• If the security system was triggered dueto an unauthorized entry into the vehicleand then you unlock the doors using therequest switch, the siren will sound 4times to remind you. If this happens,check whether your vehicle has beenbroken into while you were away from it.


NOTE:• The door locks cannot be operated by

the request switch under the followingconditions: – If any door is open or is not completely

closed.– If the ignition mode is other than

“LOCK” (OFF).• If no doors are opened within about 30

seconds after unlocking the doors bypushing the request switch, the doorswill be locked again automatically.

82PH02012

(1) 80 cm (2 1/2 feet)

When the remote controller is withinapproximately 80 cm (2 1/2 feet) from afront door handle or the tailgate switch, youcan lock or unlock the doors by pushingthe request switch.

NOTE:• If the remote controller is outside the

request switch operating rangedescribed above, you will not be able tooperate the request switch.

• If the battery of the remote controllerruns down or there are strong radiowaves or noise, the request switch oper-ating range may be reduced or theremote controller may be inoperative.

• If the remote controller is too close to thedoor glass, the request switches may notoperate.

• If a spare remote controller is in the vehi-cle, the request switches may not oper-ate normally.

• The remote controller will only operate arequest switch if it is within the switch’soperating range. For example, if theremote controller is within the operatingrange of the driver’s door request switchbut not the front passenger’s doorrequest switch or the tailgate requestswitch, the driver’s door switch can beoperated but the front passenger’s doorswitch or tailgate switch cannot be oper-ated.

NOTICE• Do not operate request switch with

sharp metal object.• Do not use high pressure water on

request switch.

(1)

(1)

(1)

EXAMPLE

NOTICEThe remote controller is a sensitiveelectronic instrument. To avoid dam-aging the remote controller:• Do not expose it to impacts, mois-

ture or high temperature such asby leaving it on the dashboardunder direct sunlight.

• Keep the remote controller awayfrom magnetic objects such as atelevision.

2-10

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

NOTE:The keyless push start system may notfunction correctly in certain environmentsor under certain operating conditions suchas the following:• When there are strong signals coming

from a television, power station or a cel-lular phone.

• When the remote controller is in contactwith or covered by a metal object.

• When a radio wave type remote keylessentry is used nearby.

• When the remote controller is placednear an electronic device such as per-sonal computer.

Some additional precautions you shouldtake and information you should be awareof are: • Make sure the key is stowed in the

remote controller. If the remote controllerbecomes unreliable, you will not be ableto lock or unlock the doors.

• Be sure that the driver always carries theremote controller.

• If you lose one of the remote controllers,ask your authorised Maruti Suzuki work-shop as soon as possible for a replace-ment. Be sure to have your dealerprogram the new remote controller codein your vehicle’s memory so that the oldcode is erased.

• You can use up to four remote control-lers and the keys for your vehicle. Askyour authorised Maruti Suzuki workshopfor details.

• The battery life of the remote controlleris about two years, but it can varydepending on usage conditions.

57L21016

To stow the key into the remote controller,push the key in the remote controller untilyou hear a click.

54P000263

To remove the key from the remote control-ler, push the button (A) in the direction ofthe arrow and pull the key out from theremote controller.

Request switch warning buzzerThis exterior buzzer beeps for about 2 sec-onds in the following conditions to warnyou that the request switch will not work-ing:• The request switch is pressed after all

doors are closed with the ignition modechanged to “ACC” or “ON” by pressingthe engine switch when the controller isoutside the vehicle.

• The request switch is pressed in any ofthe following conditions after changingthe ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF) bypressing the engine switch.– The remote controller is left inside the

vehicle.– Any door (including the tailgate) is

open.Press the request switch again after doingthe following:With the ignition mode changed to “LOCK”(OFF) by pressing the engine switch, bringout the remote controller if it is inside thevehicle and check that all doors are com-pletely closed.

(A)

2-11

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Reminder function

82PH019

If the remote controller is not in the vehicle,the buzzer sounds intermittently for about2 seconds and the immobilizer system lighton the instrument cluster blinks, under thefollowing condition:• When one or more doors are opened

and all of the doors are later closed withthe ignition mode is other than “LOCK”.

The immobilizer system light will turn offwithin several seconds after the remotecontroller is returned to an area of the vehi-cle other than the rear luggage area.

If the remote controller is left in the vehicleand you lock the driver’s door or front pas-senger’s door as described below, the doorwill be automatically unlocked.• If you open the driver’s door and lock the

door by turning the lock knob forward orpushing the power door locking switch,the driver’s door will be automaticallyunlocked.

• If you open the front passenger’s doorand lock the door by turning the lockknob forward or pushing the power doorlocking switch, the front passenger’sdoor will be automatically unlocked.

NOTE:• The reminder function will not operate

when the remote controller is on theinstrument panel, in the glove box, in astorage compartment, in the sun visor oron the floor etc.

• Be sure that the driver always carries theremote controller.

• Do not leave the remote controller in thevehicle when leaving the vehicle.

Replacement of the batteryIf the remote controller becomes unreli-able, replace the battery.

To replace the battery of the remote con-troller:

71LMT0201

1) Pull the key out from the remote con-troller.

2) Insert a flat blade screwdriver coveredwith a soft cloth in the slot of the remotecontroller and pry it open.

EXAMPLE

NOTICEWhen replacing the battery, do nottouch the electronic component in theremote controller with wet or oil-stained hands. Otherwise, the remotecontroller may be damaged.

2-12

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

68LM210

(1) Lithium disc type battery:CR2032 or equivalent

3) Replace the battery (1) so its + terminalfaces the bottom of the case as shownin the illustration.

4) Close the remote controller firmly.5) Make sure the door locks can be oper-

ated with the remote controller.6) Dispose of the used battery properly

according to applicable rules or regula-tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-ies with ordinary household trash.

NOTE:Used batteries must be disposed properlyaccording to applicable rules or regulationsand must not be disposed with ordinaryhousehold trash.

Keyless Entry System Transmitter (Type B)

76MS011

(1) “LOCK” button(2) “UNLOCK” button

You can lock or unlock all doors (includingthe tailgate) simultaneously by operatingthe transmitter near the vehicle.

Central door locking system• To lock all doors, push the “LOCK” but-

ton (1) once.• To unlock only the driver’s door, push the

“UNLOCK” button (2) once.• To unlock other doors, push the

“UNLOCK” button (2) once again.

(1)

WARNINGSwallowing a lithium battery maycause serious internal injury. Do notallow anyone to swallow a lithiumbattery. Keep lithium batteries awayfrom children and pets. If swallowed,contact a physician immediately.

NOTICEThe remote controller is a sensitiveelectronic instrument. To avoid dam-aging it, do not expose it to dust ormoisture or tamper with internal parts.

(1)(2)

2-13

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

NOTE:You can switch the function that unlocks alldoors from twice operations to once opera-tion, and vice versa, via the setting mode ofthe information display. For details on howto use the information display, refer to “Infor-mation Display” in this section.The turn signal lights will flash once and thesiren will sound once when the doors arelocked.When the doors are unlocked:• The turn signal lights will flash twice and

the siren will sound twice.• If the interior light switch is in the DOOR

position, the interior light will turn on forabout 15 seconds and then fade out. Ifyou insert the key into the ignition switchduring this time, the light will start to fadeout immediately.

Be sure the doors are locked after you oper-ate the lock button (1).

NOTE:If no door is opened within about 30 sec-onds after the unlock button (2) is operated,the doors will automatically lock again.

NOTE:• If you lock the doors using the transmitter

when the engine hood is open, the sirenwill sound 3 times to remind you.

• If the security system was triggered due toan unauthorized entry into the vehicle andthen you unlock the doors using the trans-mitter, the siren will sound 4 times toremind you. If this happens, checkwhether your vehicle has been brokeninto while you were away from it.

• Once you push both of the “LOCK” button(1) and “UNLOCK” button (2), then youpush one of the buttons within 5 seconds,the siren will not sound. However, If youpush one of the buttons twice within 5seconds, or push one of the buttons 5seconds later, the siren will sound.


NOTE:• The maximum operating distance of the

keyless entry system transmitter is about5 m (16 ft.), but this can vary dependingon the surroundings, especially near othertransmitting devices such as radio towersor CB (Citizen’s Band) radios.

• The door locks cannot be operated withthe transmitter, if the ignition key isinserted in the ignition switch.

• When any door is open, the door lockscan be operated only by unlocking withthe transmitter. With this unlocking opera-tion, the turn signal lights will flash twiceand the siren will sound twice.

• If you lose one of the transmitters, askyour authorised Maruti Suzuki workshopas soon as possible for a replacement. Besure to have your dealer program the newtransmitter code in your vehicle’s memoryso that the old code is erased.

Panic alarm functionThis function is to get the attention of others. Push both of the “LOCK” button (1) and“UNLOCK” button (2) for more than 3 sec-onds. The turn signal lights will blink forabout 27.5 seconds. Also, the siren willsound for about 27.5 seconds at the sametime.To cancel the panic alarm, press any button(“LOCK” or “UNLOCK”). You can also turnthe ignition switch to the “ON” position tocancel the panic alarm.

NOTE:The panic alarm function will not activatewhen the key is in the ignition switch.

NOTICEThe transmitter is a sensitive elec-tronic instrument. To avoid damagingthe transmitter:• Do not expose it to impacts, mois-

ture or high temperature such asby leaving it on the dashboardunder direct sunlight.

• Keep the transmitter away frommagnetic objects such as a televi-sion.

2-14

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Replacement of the batteryIf the transmitter becomes unreliable,replace the battery.

To replace the battery of the transmitter:

68LM248

1) Remove the screw (1), and open thetransmitter cover.

2) Remove the transmitter (2).

64MS197

(4) Lithium disc type battery:CR1620 or equivalent

3) Put the edge of a flat blade screwdriverin the slot of the transmitter (2) and pryit open.

4) Hold the cover around the electric com-ponent (3), insert a precision screw-driver covered with insulating tape inthe space between the cover and thecomponent, and then remove the com-ponent.

5) Replace the battery (4) so its + terminalfaces the “+” mark of the transmitter.Insert the battery all the way into theholder.

6) Close the transmitter and install it intothe transmitter holder.

7) Close the transmitter cover, install andtighten the screw (1).

8) Make sure the door locks can be oper-ated with the transmitter.

9) Dispose of the used battery properlyaccording to applicable rules or regula-tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-ies with ordinary household trash.

NOTE:Used batteries must be disposed properlyaccording to applicable rules or regulationsand must not be disposed with ordinaryhousehold trash.

NOTICEWhen replacing the battery, do nottouch the electronic component inthe transmitter with wet or oil-stainedhands. Otherwise, the transmittermay be damaged.

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3)

(4)

WARNINGSwallowing a lithium battery maycause serious internal injury. Do notallow anyone to swallow a lithiumbattery. Keep lithium batteries awayfrom children and pets. If swallowed,contact a physician immediately.

NOTICEThe transmitter is a sensitive elec-tronic instrument. To avoid damagingit, do not expose it to dust or mois-ture or tamper with internal parts.

2-15

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Security System (if equipped)The security system is armed in about 5seconds after you lock all doors (includingthe tailgate) by using the keyless entry sys-tem transmitter, keyless push start systemremote controller or request switch.Once the system is armed, any attempt toopen a door by using any other means (*)than the keyless entry system transmitter,keyless push start system remote control-ler or request switch, or open the enginehood, will cause the alarm to be triggered.* These means include the following:

– The key– The lock knob on a door– The central door locking switch

Also, in case that you have set the shocksensor to enabled state and set sensitivityof the pre-warning function and full blastwarning function to a level other than 0, thealarm will be triggered in case of anyattempt to tamper with the vehicle. Theshock sensor can be selected to enabledor disabled state, and sensitivity of eachwarning can be adjusted as desired. To setthe shock sensor, ask your authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop or use the settingmode of the information display.

NOTE:• The default setting of the shock sensor

is in the disabled state. Set to theenabled state and adjust sensitivity ofeach warning according to your prefer-

ence. For details on how to use the infor-mation display, refer to “InformationDisplay” in this section.

• Your dealer may have already set theshock sensor of the vehicle to theenabled state before you purchase it.Consult your dealer for further informa-tion.

NOTE:• The security system generates alarms

when any of the predetermined condi-tions is met. However, the system doesnot have any function of blocking unau-thorized entry into the vehicle.

• Always use the keyless entry systemtransmitter, keyless push start systemremote controller or request switch tounlock the doors when the security sys-tem has been armed. Using a keyinstead will trigger the alarm.

• If a person who does not know the secu-rity system is going to drive the vehicle,we recommend you explain the systemand its operation to the person, or dis-able the system beforehand. Mistakenlytriggering the alarm may cause a nui-sance to others.

• Even if the security system is armed,you should still be careful to guardagainst theft. Do not leave money orthings of value in the vehicle.

How to arm the security system (when enabled)Lock all doors (including the tailgate) usingthe keyless entry system transmitter, key-less push start system remote controller orrequest switch. The security system indica-tor (1) will start blinking rapidly, and thesecurity system will be armed in about 5seconds.While the system is being armed, the indi-cator continues to blink at intervals ofapproximately 2 seconds.

82PH02016

NOTE:• To prevent the alarm from being acci-

dentally triggered, avoid arming it whileanyone remains inside the vehicle. Thealarm will be triggered if any personinside opens the door or engine hood, orswings the vehicle (if the shock sensor isin the enabled state).

(1)

EXAMPLE

2-16

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

• The security system is not armed whenall doors are locked using the key fromoutside, or using the door lock knobs orthe central door locking switch frominside.

• If any door is not operated within approx-imately 30 seconds after the doors havebeen unlocked using the keyless entrysystem transmitter, keyless push startsystem remote controller or requestswitch, the doors are automaticallylocked again. When the doors arelocked, the security system will bearmed in about 5 seconds if the systemis in the enabled state.

• If the security system indicator (1) blinkswhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is “ON”,there may be something wrong with thesecurity system. Ask your authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop to inspect thesystem.

How to disarm the security systemSimply unlock the doors using the keylessentry system transmitter, keyless pushstart system remote controller or requestswitch. The security system indicator willgo out, indicating that the security systemis disarmed.

How to stop the alarmShould the alarm be triggered accidentally,unlock the doors using the keyless entrysystem transmitter, keyless push start sys-tem remote controller or request switch, or

insert the key in the ignition switch and turnit to “ON” position, or press the engineswitch to change the ignition mode to“ON”. The alarm will then stop.NOTE:• Even after the alarm has stopped, if you

lock the doors using the keyless entrysystem transmitter, keyless push startsystem remote controller or requestswitch, the security system will berearmed with a delay of about 5 sec-onds.

• If you disconnect the battery while thesecurity system is in the armed conditionor the alarm is actually in operation, thealarm will be re-triggered when the bat-tery is then reconnected.

• Even after the alarm has stopped at theend of the predetermined operation time,it will be triggered again if any of thedoors or engine hood is opened, or thevehicle feels a shock (if the shock sen-sor is in the enabled state), without dis-arming the security system.

Checking whether the alarm has beentriggered during parkingIf the alarm was triggered and you thenturn the ignition switch to “ON” position, orpress the engine switch to change the igni-tion mode to “ON”, the security systemindicator will blink rapidly for about 8 sec-onds and a buzzer will beep 4 times duringthis period. If this happens, check whetherthe vehicle has been broken into while youwere away from it.

Enabling and disabling the securitysystemThe security system can be either enabledor disabled.

When enabled• If any of the doors are opened without

unlocking by the keyless entry systemtransmitter, keyless push start systemremote controller or request switch, allturn signal lights start to blink and theinterior buzzer beeps intermittently. After5 seconds, the siren will sound for about27.5 seconds. The security system indi-cator continues to blink during this time.

• If the engine hood is opened, all turn sig-nal lights blink, and the siren sounds forabout 27.5 seconds. The security sys-tem indicator continues to blink duringthis time.

• If the vehicle feels a shock (If the shocksensor is in the enabled state), the sirensounds for about 2 seconds (pre-warn-ing). If the vehicle continues to feel ashock, all turn signal lights start to blinkand the interior buzzer beeps intermit-tently. After 5 seconds, the siren willsound for about 27.5 seconds (full blastwarning). The security system indicatorcontinues to blink during this time.

NOTE:If you set the full blast warning sensitivityhigher than the pre-warning sensitivity inthe setting mode of the information display,or the vehicle feels such shock as to be

2-17

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

able to trigger the full blast warning, the fullblast warning will be triggered preferen-tially. In this case, the pre-warning will notbe triggered.

When disabledWhen the system is disabled, it stays dis-armed even if you perform any systemarming operation.

How to switch the state of the securitysystemWhen the security system has beenalready disarmed, you can switch the sys-tem from the enabled state to the disabledstate, and vice versa, using the followingmethod.

1) Sit in the driver’s seat and make surethat all doors are closed, and then turnthe ignition switch to “ON” position orpress the engine switch to change theignition mode to “ON”.• If any door is open, the open door

warning light comes on.

82PH02005

76MH0B004

2) Turn the lock knob (1) on the driver’sdoor rearward (2). Turn the knob on thelightning control lever to the “OFF” posi-tion (3).

NOTE:The following steps 3) and 4) must becompleted within 15 seconds.

76MH0B005

3) Turn the knob on the lighting controllever to the position and then turnback to the “OFF” position. Repeat thisoperation 4 times.

(1) (2)

EXAMPLE

(3)

EXAMPLE

OFF

4 times

EXAMPLE

2-18

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

82PH02006

4) Push the lock end (4) (forward end) ofthe central door locking switch (5), andthen push the unlock end (6) (backwardend). Repeat this operation 3 times.

Every time you perform the series of theabove steps, the state of the security sys-tem changes from the currently selectedone to the other. You can check whetherthe system is enabled or disabled by thenumber of interior buzzer beeps at the endof the procedure as follows.

• If you cannot complete the operations instep 3) and 4) within 15 seconds cor-rectly, the state of the security systemwill not change and the interior buzzerdoes not beep. Perform the procedureagain from the beginning.

NOTE:You can also switch the security systemfrom the enabled state to the disabledstate, and vice versa, via the setting modeof the information display. For details onhow to use the information display, refer to“Information Display” in this section.

WindowsManual Window Control (if equipped)

60G010

Raise or lower the door windows by turningthe handle located on the door panel.

AUTO

(4)(6)

(5)

3 times

EXAMPLE System state Number of beeps

Disabled Once

Enabled 4 timesEXAMPLE

2-19

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Electric Window Controls (if equipped)The electric windows can only be operatedwhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is “ON”.

Driver’s door (Type A)

82PH02028

Driver’s door (Type B)

82PH02007

The driver’s door has a switch (1) to oper-ate the driver’s window, and a switch (2) tooperate the front passenger’s window orthere are switches (4), (5), to operate therear left and right passenger windows,respectively.

Passenger’s door

82PH02013

The passenger’s door has a switch (3) tooperate that passenger’s window.

AUTO

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

AUTO(2)

(5)

(4)

(1)EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

(3)

2-20

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

81A009

To open a window, push the top part of theswitch and to close the window, lift up thetop part of the switch.The driver’s window has auto-down fea-ture and auto-up feature (if equipped) foradded convenience (at toll booths or drive-through restaurants, for example). Thismeans the driver can open or close thewindow without holding the window switchin the down or up position. Press down orlift up the driver’s window switch com-pletely and release it. To stop the windowbefore it reaches the full-down or full-upposition, pull up or push down the switchbriefly.

Lock switch (Type A)

82PH02027

Lock switch (Type B)

82PH02014

The driver’s door also has a lock switch (1)for the passenger’s window(s). When youpush in the lock switch (1), the passen-ger’s window(s) cannot be raised or low-

ered by operating any of the switches (2),(3) or (4). To restore normal operation,release the lock switch by pushing again.

NOTE:If you drive with one of the rear windowsopen, you may hear a loud sound causedby air vibration. To reduce the sound, openthe driver’s or front passenger’s window, ornarrow the rear window opening.

CLOSE

OPEN

AUTO

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

(4)

(2)

AUTO

(3)

(1)

EXAMPLE

WARNING• You should always lock the pas-

senger’s window operation whenthere are children in the vehicle.Children can be seriously injured ifthey get part of their body caughtby the window during operation.

• To avoid injuring an occupant bywindow entrapment, be sure nopart of the occupant’s body such ashands or head is in the path of theelectric windows when closingthem.

• Always remove the ignition key ortake the keyless push start systemremote controller with you whenleaving the vehicle even if only fora short time. Also do not leave chil-dren alone in a parked vehicle.Unattended children could use theelectric window switches and gettrapped by the window.

2-21

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Pinching Prevention Function (if equipped)If the driver’s window has the auto-up fea-ture, the driver’s window is also equippedwith the pinching prevention function. Thefunction detects a foreign object caught inthe window while being closed by the auto-up feature (by which you can close thewindow without holding the window switchin the up position), and stops the windowclosing to prevent damage.

NOTE:Even if you cannot close the window by theauto-up feature because there may besomething wrong with the pinching preven-tion function, you can close the window byholding the window switch in the up posi-tion.If you drive in extreme off-road condition,the pinching prevention function may oper-ate accidentally because the window reactto vehicle jolting.

The Pinching Prevention Function Ini-tializationWhen you disconnect and re-connect thebattery or replace the power window fuse(20A), the function will be deactivated. Inthis condition, the auto-down feature willbe deactivated, while the auto-up featuremay remain being activated. The pinchingprevention function needs to be initialized.To initialize the pinching prevention func-tion, use the following procedure:1) Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position or press the engine switch tochange the ignition mode to “ON”.

2) Open the driver’s window fully by hold-ing the window switch in the down posi-tion.

3) Close the driver’s window by holdingthe switch in the up position, and keepholding the switch for 2 seconds afterthe window fully closed.

4) Check the driver’s window if the auto-down/up feature work.

If the auto-down/up feature would not workafter initialization, there might be some-thing wrong with the pinching preventionfunction. Have your vehicle inspected byan authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

WARNINGTo avoid injuring an occupant by win-dow entrapment, be sure no part ofthe occupant’s body such as handsor head is in the path of the electricwindow when closing it.The function may not detect theobject depending on size, hardness,and position of the object caught bythe closing window.

CAUTION• The pinching prevention function

does not act while you are holdingthe window switch in the up posi-tion.

• The pinching prevention functionmay not detect an object caught inthe window just before the windowis fully closed.

WARNINGWhenever you disconnect and recon-nect the battery or replace the powerwindow fuse (20A), the pinching pre-vention function needs to be initial-ized. The pinching prevention function willnot be activated until the initializationcomplete.

2-22

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

MirrorsInside Rearview Mirror

68LMT0205

82PH02039

(2) Day driving(3) Night driving

You can adjust the inside rearview mirrorby hand so as to see the rear of your vehi-cle in the mirror.To adjust the mirror, set the selector tab (1)to the day position, then move the mirrorup, down or sideways by hand to obtainthe best view.

When driving at night, you can move theselector tab to the night position to reduceglare from the headlights of vehiclesbehind you.

Outside Rearview MirrorsAdjust the outside rearview mirrors so youcan just see the side of your vehicle in themirrors.

82PH02018

The switch to control the electric mirrors islocated on the instrument panel. You canadjust the mirrors when the ignition switchis in the “ACC” or “ON” position, or the igni-tion mode is “ACC” or “ON”. To adjust themirrors:

(1)(2) (3)

WARNING• Always adjust the mirror with the

selector set to the day position.• Only use the night position if it is

necessary to reduce glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you.Be aware that in this position youmay not be able to see someobjects that could be seen in theday position.

WARNINGBe careful when judging the size ordistance of a vehicle or other objectseen in the side convex mirror. Beaware that objects look smaller andappear farther away than when seenin a flat mirror.

L R

EXAMPLE

2-23

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

1) Move the selector switch (L - R knob) tothe left or right to select the mirror youwish to adjust.

2) Press the control knob of the switch inthe direction that corresponds to thedirection in which you wish to move themirror.

3) Return the selector switch to the centerposition to help prevent unintendedadjustment.

Outside Rearview Mirrors Folding Switch (if equipped)

82PH02019

You can fold the mirrors when you park thevehicle in a narrow space. When the igni-tion mode is “ACC” or “ON”, push the lowerpart (2) of the folding switch to fold the mir-rors. To unfold the mirrors, push the upperpart (1) of the switch. Make sure the mir-rors are completely unfolded before youstart driving.

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment

CAUTIONMoving mirrors can pinch and injurea hand. Do not allow any one’s handto get near the mirrors when foldingand unfolding the mirrors.

EXAMPLE

12

0

L R

(1)

(2)

WARNINGNever attempt to adjust the driver’sseat or seatback while driving. Theseat or seatback could move unex-pectedly, causing loss of control.Make sure that the driver’s seat andseatback are properly adjustedbefore you start driving.

WARNINGTo avoid excessive seat belt slack,which reduces the effectiveness ofthe seat belts as a safety device,make sure that the seats are adjustedbefore the seat belts are fastened.

WARNINGAll seatbacks should always be in anupright position when driving, or seatbelt effectiveness may be reduced.Seat belts are designed to offer maxi-mum protection when seatbacks arein the upright position.

2-24

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

64MS154

(1)(2)(3)

EXAMPLESeat position adjustment lever (1)Pull the lever up and slide the seat.

Seatback angle adjustment lever (2)Pull the lever up and move the seatback.

Seat height adjustment lever (3) (if equipped)Pull the lever up to raise the seat. Push thelever down to lower the seat.

After adjustment, try to move the seat andseatback forward and rearward to ensurethat it is securely latched.

2-25

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Head Restraints

80J001

Head restraints are designed to helpreduce the risk of neck injuries in the caseof an accident. Adjust the head restraint tothe position which places the center of thehead restraint closest to the top of yourears. If this is not possible for very tall pas-sengers, adjust the head restraint as highas possible.

NOTE:It may be necessary to recline the seat-back to provide enough overhead clear-ance to remove the head restraint.

Front

61MM0A032

To raise the front head restraint, pullupward on the restraint until it clicks. Tolower the restraint, push down on therestraint while holding in the lock lever. If ahead restraint must be removed (for clean-ing, replacement, etc.), push in the locklever and pull the head restraint all the wayout.

Rear SeatsHead Restraints (if equipped)Head restraints are designed to helpreduce the risk of neck injuries in the caseof an accident.

NOTE:It may be necessary to fold forward theseatback to provide enough overheadclearance to remove the head restraint.

Adjust the head restraint to the positionwhich places the center of the headrestraint closest to the top of your ears. Ifthis is not possible for very tall passengers,adjust the head restraint as high as possi-ble.

WARNING• Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed.• Do not attempt to adjust the head

restraint while driving.

EXAMPLE WARNING• Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed.• Do not attempt to adjust the head

restraint while driving.

2-26

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Rear

61MM0A033

To raise the rear head restraint, pullupward on the restraint until it clicks. Tolower the restraint, push down on therestraint while holding in the lock lever. If ahead restraint must be removed (for clean-ing, replacement, etc.), push in the locklever and pull the head restraint all the wayout.When installing a child restraint system,raise the head restraint to the most upperposition.

Folding Rear SeatsThe rear seat(s) of your vehicle can befolded forward to provide additional cargospace.

To fold the rear seats forward:

82PH02020

1) Insert the latch plate of the outboardlap-shoulder belts into the slit (1).

2) Set the front seat back to upright posi-tion and if necessary, slide the frontseat forward.

82PH02021

3) Lift the front portion of the seat cushion.

82PH02026

EXAMPLE

NOTICE• When you move a seatback, make

sure the latch plate is inserted intothe slit securely so the seat beltsare not caught by the seatback,seat hinge, or seat latch. This helpsprevent damage to the belt system.

• Make sure the belt webbing is nottwisted.

(1)

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

2-27

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

82PH02022

4) Lift the rear portion of seat cushion toupright position.

5) Remove the head restraint (if equipped)from the seat back(s).

82PH02023

6) Pull up the release straps on the top ofthe seat(s), and fold the seatback for-ward.

82PH02024

7) Insert the head restraint(s) (if equipped)rod (1) into the loop (2) provided on thecushion(s).

To return the seat to the normal position,follow the procedure below.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

NOTICEAfter folding the rear seatback for-ward, do not allow any foreign mate-rial to enter the lock slot. This maycause damage to the inside of thelock and prevent the seatback frombeing locked securely.

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

WARNINGIf you need to carry cargo in the pas-senger compartment with the rearseat back folded forward, be sure tosecure the cargo or it may be thrownabout, causing injury. Never pilecargo higher than the seatbacks.

WARNINGWhen returning the rear seatback tothe normal position, make sure thatthere is nothing around the striker.Any foreign materials prevent theseatback from being locked securely.

2-28

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

NOTE:When returning the seat(s) to normal posi-tion, place the rear safety belt and bucklesto proper position. Ensure that the safetybelts are not twisted or pinched under therear seat cushion.

82PH02025

1) Raise the seatback until it locks intoplace.

After returning the seat, try moving theseatback to make sure they are securelylatched.

2) Install the head restraint(s) (ifequipped) on the seat back.

3) Move the seat cushion to its originalposition. Push the front part of the seatcushion down to latch it in place.

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems

60MHM02002

CAUTIONWhen returning the rear seatback tothe normal position, be careful thatyour finger is not caught between thelock and the striker.

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONDo not put your hand into the rearseatback lock opening, or your fingermay get caught and be injured.

NOTICE• When returning the rear seatback

to the normal position, do not allowany foreign material to enter thelock opening. This may prevent theseatback from being lockedsecurely.

• When returning the rear seatbackto the normal position, be sure tohandle it carefully by hand to avoidany damage to the lock itself. Donot push it by using some materialor by applying excessive force.

• As the lock is designed exclusivelyfor securing the rear seatback, donot use it for any other purpose.Incorrect use of it may cause dam-age to the inside of the lock andprevent the seatback from beinglocked securely.

WARNINGWear Your Seat Belts at All Times.

WARNINGAn air bag supplements, or adds to,the frontal crash protection offeredby seat belts. The driver and all pas-sengers must be properly restrainedby wearing seat belts at all times,whether or not an air bag is mountedat their seating position, to minimizethe risk of severe injury or death inthe event of a crash.

2-29

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

65D606 65D201 65D199

WARNING• Never allow persons to ride in the

cargo area of a vehicle. In the eventof an accident, there is a muchgreater risk of injury for personswho are not riding in a seat withtheir seat belt securely fastened.

• Seat belts should always beadjusted as follows:– the lap portion of the belt should

be worn low across the pelvis,not across the waist.

– the shoulder straps should beworn on the outside shoulderonly, and never under the arm.

– the shoulder straps should beaway from your face and neck,but not falling off your shoulder.

(Continued)

Above the pelvis

WARNING(Continued)• Seat belts should never be worn

with the straps twisted and shouldbe adjusted as tightly as is com-fortable to provide the protectionfor which they have been designed.A slack belt will provide less pro-tection than one which is snug.

• Make sure that each seat beltbuckle is inserted into the properbuckle catch. It is possible to crossthe buckles in the rear seat.

(Continued)

Across the pelvis

WARNING(Continued)• Pregnant women should use seat

belts, although specific recommen-dations about driving should bemade by the woman’s medical advi-sor. Remember that the lap portionof the belt should be worn as lowas possible across the hips, asshown in the diagram.

• Do not wear your seat belt overhard or breakable objects in yourpockets or on your clothing. If anaccident occurs, objects such asglasses, pens, etc. under the seatbelt can cause injury.

(Continued)

as low as possible across the hips

2-30

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Lap-Shoulder BeltEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR)The seat belt has an emergency lockingretractor (ELR), which is designed to lockthe seat belt only during a sudden stop orimpact. It also may lock if you pull the beltacross your body very quickly. If this hap-pens, let the belt go back to unlock it, thenpull the belt across your body more slowly.

Safety reminder

60A038

WARNING(Continued)• Never use the same seat belt on

more than one occupant and neverattach a seat belt over an infant orchild being held on an occupant’slap. Such seat belt use could causeserious injury in the event of anaccident.

• Periodically inspect seat beltassemblies for excessive wear anddamage. Seat belts should bereplaced if webbing becomesfrayed, contaminated, or damagedin any way. It is essential to replacethe entire seat belt assembly after ithas been worn in a severe impact,even if damage to the assembly isnot obvious.

• Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in the rearseat.

• Infants and small children shouldnever be transported unless theyare properly restrained. Restraintsystems for infants and small chil-dren can be purchased locally andshould be used. Make sure that thesystem you purchase meets appli-cable safety standards. Read andfollow all the directions providedby the manufacturer.

(Continued)

WARNING(Continued)• For children, if the shoulder belt

irritates the neck or face, move thechild closer to the center of thevehicle.

• Avoid contamination of seat beltwebbing by polishes, oils, chemi-cals, and particularly battery acid.Cleaning may safely be carried outusing mild soap and water.

• Do not insert any items such ascoins, clips, etc. into the seat beltbuckles, and be careful not to spillliquids into these parts. If foreignmaterials get into a seat beltbuckle, the seat belt may not workproperly.

• All seatbacks should always be inan upright position when driving,or seat belt effectiveness may bereduced. Seat belts are designed tooffer maximum protection whenseatbacks are in the upright posi-tion.

Sit up straight and fully back

Low on hips

2-31

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

60A040

To reduce the risk of sliding under the beltduring a collision, position the lap portionof the belt across your lap as low on yourhips as possible and adjust it to a snug fitby pulling the shoulder portion of the beltupward through the latch plate. The lengthof the diagonal shoulder strap adjusts itselfto allow freedom of movement.

All Seat Belts Except Rear CenterAll seat belts except rear center are thelap-shoulder belt.

60A036

To fasten the seat belt, sit up straight andwell back in the seat, pull the latch plateattached to the seat belt across your bodyand press it straight into the buckle untilyou hear a click.

60A039

To unfasten the seat belt, push the buttonon the buckle and retract the belt slowlywhile attaching a hand to the belt or/andthe latch plate.

Low on hips

2-32

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Rear Center Seat BeltRear center seat belt is the lap belt.To fasten the belt, pull the latch plateattached to the seat belt across your hipsand press it straight into the buckle untilyou hear a click. To reduce the risk of slid-ing under the belt during a collision, posi-tion the belt across your lap as low on yourhips as possible and adjust it to a snug fit.

80JS028

To tighten the belt, pull the free end of thebelt across alongside the lap strap.

80JS029

To lengthen, release the latch plate fromthe buckle, pull the latch plate (adjuster) inthe direction of the arrow, at right angles tothe belt. The latch plate should then berefitted into the buckle and the belt tight-ened as previously described.To unfasten the belt, press the release but-ton on the buckle catch.

80JS031

NOTE:To identify the center seat belt buckle andlatch plate in the rear seat, “CENTER” ismarked on the buckle and latch plate of thecenter lap belt. The buckles are designedso a latch plate cannot be inserted into thewrong buckle.

TO TIGHTEN

Low on hips

TO LOOSEN

Right angle

2-33

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder

64MS045

(1) Driver’s seat belt reminder light

When the driver doesn’t buckle his or herseat belt, with the ignition switch in the“ON” position or the ignition mode “ON”,the driver’s seat belt reminder light in theinstrument cluster will blink and a buzzerwill sound as a reminder to the driver tobuckle his or her sear belt. For moredetails, refer to the explanation below.

If the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckledwhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is “ON”, thereminder works as follows:

1. The driver’s seat belt reminder light willcome on.

2. After the vehicle’s speed has reachedabout 15 km/h, the driver’s seat beltreminder light will blink and a buzzerwill sound for about 95 seconds.

3. After step 2) has finished, the reminderlight will remain on until the driver’s seatbelt is buckled.

If the driver has buckled his or her seat beltand later unbuckles the seat belt, the seatbelt reminder system will be activated fromstep 1) or step 2) according to vehicle’sspeed. When the vehicle’s speed is belowabout 15 km/h, the reminder will start fromstep 1). When the vehicle’s speed is aboveabout 15 km/h, the reminder will start fromstep 2).

The reminder will be automatically can-celled when the driver’s seat belt is buck-led or the ignition switch is turned off,ignition mode is switched to OFF position.

Rear Seat Belt Hanger

76MH0A028

(1)

EXAMPLE

WARNINGIt is absolutely essential that thedriver and passengers wear their seatbelts at all times. Persons who arenot wearing seat belts have a muchgreater risk of injury if an accidentoccurs. Make a regular habit of buck-ling your seat belt before putting thekey in the ignition or pressing theengine switch.

NOTICE• When you move a seatback, make

sure the latch plate is inserted intothe slit (1) securely so the seatbelts are not caught by the seat-back, seat hinge, or seat latch. Thishelps prevent damage to the beltsystem.

• Make sure the belt webbing is nottwisted.

(1)

EXAMPLE

2-34

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Shoulder Anchor Height Adjuster (if equipped)

64J198

Adjust the shoulder anchor height so thatthe shoulder belt rides on the center of theoutboard shoulder. To move upward, slidethe anchor up. To move downward, slidethe anchor down while pulling the lockknob out. After adjustment, make sure thatthe anchor is securely locked.

Seat Belt Inspection

65D209S

Periodically inspect the seat belts to makesure they work properly and are not dam-aged. Check the webbing, buckles, latchplates, retractors, anchorages, and guideloops. Replace any seat belts which do notwork properly or are damaged.

WARNINGBe sure that the shoulder belt is posi-tioned on the center of the outsideshoulder. The belt should be awayfrom your face and neck, but not fall-ing off your shoulder. Misadjustmentof the belt could reduce the effective-ness of the safety belt in a crash.

EXAMPLEEXAMPLE

WARNINGBe sure to inspect all seat beltassemblies after any collision. Anyseat belt assembly which was in useduring a collision (other than a veryminor one) should be replaced, evenif damage to the assembly is notobvious. Any seat belt assemblywhich was not in use during a colli-sion should be replaced if it does notfunction properly, it is damaged inany way or the seat belt pretensionerwas activated.

2-35

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Child Restraint Systems

60G332S

Infant restraint

79J221

Child restraint

79J222

Booster seat

79J223

MARUTI SUZUKI highly recommends thatyou use a child restraint system to restraininfants and small children. Many differenttypes of child restraint systems are avail-able; make sure that the restraint systemyou select meets applicable safety stan-dards.All child restraint systems are designed tobe secured on vehicle seats by either seatbelts (lap belts or the lap portion of lap-shoulder belts). Whenever possible,MARUTI SUZUKI recommends that childrestraint systems be installed on the rearseat. According to accident statistics, chil-dren are safer when properly restrained inrear seating positions than in front seatingpositions.If you must use a front-facing childrestraint in the front passenger’s seat,adjust the passenger’s seat as far back aspossible.

NOTE:Observe any statutory regulation aboutchild restraints.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

2-36

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

58MS03065D608

65D609

WARNINGIf your vehicle is equipped with afront passenger air bag, do not installa rear-facing child restraint in thefront passenger’s seat. If the passen-ger’s air bag inflates, a child in a rear-facing child restraint could be killedor seriously injured. The back of arear-facing child restraint would betoo close to the inflating air bag.

WARNINGIf you install a child restraint systemin the rear seat, slide the front seatfar enough forward so that the child’sfeet do not touch the front seatback.This will help avoid injury to the childin the event of an accident.

WARNINGChildren could be endangered in acrash if their child restraints are notproperly secured in the vehicle.When installing a child restraint sys-tem, be sure to follow the instruc-tions below. Be sure to secure thechild in the restraint system accord-ing to the manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

WARNINGIn an accident or sudden stop, therear seat armrest (if equipped) couldfall forward. If there is a child in arear-facing child restraint in the rearcenter seating position, the fallingarmrest could injure the child. Do notinstall a rear-facing child restraint inthe rear center seating position.

2-37

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Installation with Lap-Shoulder Seat Belts

NOTE:If the upper most position head restraintinterferes a child restraint system and pre-vents the child restraint system from beinginstalled securely, remove the headrestraint.Stow the removed head restraint in the lug-gage compartment so it will not causeinconvenience to the occupants.

ELR type belt

80JC021

Install your child restraint system accord-ing to the instructions provided by the childrestraint system manufacturer.Make sure that the seat belt is securelylatched.Try to move the child restraint system in alldirections to make sure it is securelyinstalled.

Installation with a Lap Belt

60G132

Install your child restraint system accord-ing to the instructions provided by the childrestraint system manufacturer.

To lengthen or tighten the belt, refer to the“Lap-belt” item in this “Seat Belts andChild Restraint Systems” section. Aftermaking sure that the seat belt is securelylatched, try moving the child restraint sys-tem in all directions, to make sure it issecurely installed. If you need to tightenthe belt, pull the free end of the webbing.

NOTICEBefore installing a child restraint sys-tem in the rear seat, raise the headrestraint (if equipped) to the uppermost position.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

Pull to tighten

2-38

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Child Restraint System for IndiaChild Restraint

The suitability of each passenger’s seat position for carriage of children and fitting of child restraint system is shown in the table below.Whenever you carry children up to 12 years of age, properly use the child restraints which conform to AIS 072, the standard for childrestraints, referring to the table.

Key of letters to be inserted in the above table:U =Suitable for ‘universal’ category restraints approved for use in this mass groupX =Seat position not suitable for children in this mass groupN.A = Seat position not available for children in this mass group. NOTE: ‘universal’ is the category in the AIS 072. : ‘Outboard’ indicates window side seat.

MASS GROUP

Seating position (or other site)

Front Passenger

Rear Outboard

Rear Centre

Intermediate Outboard

Intermediate Centre

Group 0Up to 10 kg X U X N.A. N.A.

Group 0+Up to 13 kg X U X N.A. N.A.

Group I9 to 18 kg X U X N.A. N.A.

Group II15 to 25 kg X U X N.A. N.A.

Group III22 to 36 kg X U X N.A. N.A.

2-39

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Seat Belt Pretensioner System (if equipped)

63J269

To determine if your vehicle is equippedwith a seat belt pretensioner system at thefront seating positions, check the label onthe front seat belt at the bottom part. If theletters “p” and/or “PRE” appear as illus-trated, your vehicle is equipped with theseat belt pretensioner system. You can usethe pretensioner seat belts in the samemanner as ordinary seat belts.Read this section and the “SupplementalRestraint System (air bags)” section tolearn more about the pretensioner system.The seat belt pretensioner system workswith the SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM (Air Bags). The crash sensorsand the electronic controller of the air bagsystem also control the seat belt preten-sioners. The pretensioners are triggeredonly when there is a frontal crash severeenough to trigger the air bags and the seatbelts are fastened. For precautions andgeneral information including servicing thepretensioner system, refer to the “Supple-mental Restraint System (air bags)” sec-tion in addition to this “Seat BeltPretensioner System” section, and followall those precautions.

The pretensioner is located in each frontseat belt retractor. The pretensioner tight-ens the seat belt so the belt fits the occu-pant’s body more snugly in the event of afrontal crash. The retractors will remainlocked after the pretensioners are acti-vated. Upon activation, some noise willoccur and some smoke may be released.These conditions are not harmful and donot indicate a fire in the vehicle.

The driver and all passengers must beproperly restrained by wearing seat beltsat all times, whether or not a pretensioneris equipped at their seating position, tominimize the risk of severe injury or deathin the event of a crash.

Sit fully back in the seat; sit up straight; donot lean forward or sideways. Adjust thebelt so the lap portion of the belt is wornlow across the pelvis, not across the waist.Please refer to the “Seat Adjustment” sec-tion and the instructions and precautionsabout the seat belts in this “Seat Belts andChild Restraint Systems” section for detailson proper seat and seat belt adjustments.

WARNINGThis section of the owner’s manualdescribes your vehicle’s SEAT BELTPRETENSIONER SYSTEM. Pleaseread and follow ALL these instruc-tions carefully to minimize your riskof severe injury or death.

and/or

Label

EXAMPLE

2-40

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Please note that the pretensioners alongwith the air bags will activate in severefrontal collisions. They are not designed toactivate in side impacts, rear impacts, roll-overs, or minor frontal collisions. The pre-tensioners can be activated only once. Ifthe pretensioners are activated (that is, ifthe air bags are activated), have the pre-tensioner system replaced by an autho-rised Maruti Suzuki workshop as soon aspossible.

The pretensioner system or the air bagsystem may not work properly if any of thefollowing conditions occur :1) If the air bag light on the instrument

cluster does not come on briefly, whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position or the engine switch is pressedto change the ignition mode to “ON”.

2) If the air bag light comes on and stayson for more than 10 seconds, when theignition switch is turned to the “ON”position or the engine switch is pressedto change the ignition mode to “ON”.

3) If the air bag light comes on while driv-ing.

Have both systems inspected by an autho-rised Maruti Suzuki workshop as soon aspossible.Service on or around the pretensioner sys-tem components or wiring must be per-formed only by an authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop who is specially trained.Improper service could result in unin-

tended activation of pretensioners or couldrender the pretensioner inoperative. Eitherof these two conditions may result in per-sonal injury.

To prevent damage or unintended activa-tion of the pretensioners, be sure the bat-tery is disconnected and the ignition switchhas been in the “LOCK” position or theignition mode has been “LOCK” (OFF) forat least 90 seconds before performing anyelectrical service work on your authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop.

Do not touch pretensioner system compo-nents or wiring. The wires are wrappedwith yellow tape or yellow tubing, and thecouplers are yellow. When scrapping yourvehicle, ask your authorised Maruti Suzukiworkshop, body repair shop, or scrap yardfor assistance.

2-41

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Supplemental Restraint System (air bags) (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a Supple-mental Restraint System consisting of thefollowing components in addition to a lap-shoulder belt at each front seating position.

1. Driver’s front air bag module2. Front passenger’s front air bag mod-

ule (if equipped)3. Seat belt pretensioners (if equipped)4. Air bag controller5. Forward crash sensor

WARNINGThis section of the owner’s manualdescribes the protection provided byyour Vehicle’s SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEM (air bags). Please read and follow ALL theseinstructions carefully to minimizeyour risk of severe injury or death inthe event of a collision.

82PH02036

EXAMPLE

4

1

2

5

3

3

2-42

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Air bag light

63J030

If the air bag light on the instrument clusterdoes not blink or come on when the igni-tion switch is first turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or the ignition mode is first changed to“ON”, or the air bag light stays on, orcomes on while driving, the air bag system(or the seat belt pretensioner system (ifequipped)) may not work properly. Havethe air bag system inspected by an autho-rised Maruti Suzuki workshop as soon aspossible.

Air bag symbol (if equipped) meaning

72M00150

You may find this label on the sun visor.

Front Air Bags

63J113

Front air bags are designed to inflate insevere frontal collisions when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position or the ignitionmode is “ON”.

Front air bags are not designed to inflate inrear impacts, side impacts, rollovers orminor frontal collisions, since they wouldoffer no protection in those types of acci-dents. Remember, since an air bagdeploys only one time during an accident,seat belts are needed to restrain occu-pants from further movements during theaccident.

WARNINGAn air bag supplements, or adds to,the crash protection offered by seatbelts. The driver and all passengersmust be properly restrained by wear-ing seat belts at all times, whether ornot an air bag is mounted at theirseating position, to minimize the riskof severe injury or death in the eventof a crash.

WARNINGNEVER use a rearward facing childrestraint on a seat protected by anACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATHor SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILDcan occur.

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

2-43

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Therefore, an air bag is NOT a substitutefor seat belts. To maximize your protection,ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS. Beaware that no system can prevent all pos-sible injuries that may occur in an accident.

Driver’s front air bag

82PH02008

Front passenger’s front air bag (if equipped)

82PH02009

The driver’s front air bag is located behindthe center pad of the steering wheel andthe front passenger’s front air bag islocated behind the passenger’s side of thedashboard. The words “SRS AIRBAG” are molded intothe air bag covers to identify the location ofthe air bags.

58MS030

Please refer to the “Seat Belts and ChildRestraint Systems” section in this sectionfor details on securing your child.

SRS AIRBAG

100 1203 4

5

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

WARNINGIf your vehicle is equipped with afront passenger air bag, do not installa rear-facing child restraint in thefront passenger’s seat. If the passen-ger’s air bag inflates, a child in a rear-facing child restraint could be killedor seriously injured. The back of arear-facing child restraint would betoo close to the inflating air bag.

2-44

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Conditions of front air bags deployment(inflation)

80J097

• In frontal collisions with a fixed wall thatdoes not move or deform in more thanabout 25 km/h (15 mph)

80J098E

• In collisions such as above at an angleof about 30 degrees (1) or less from thefront

Conditions in which front air bags mayinflateReceiving a strong impact to the lowerbody of your vehicle, the front air bags willinflate in many cases.

80J099

• Hitting a curb or medial strip

80J100E

• Falling into a deep hole or ditch

80J101

• Landing hard or falling

Front air bags may or may not inflate ina strong impact

80J120

• Collision from the rear

(1)

(1)

2-45

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

80J119

• Collision from the side

80J110

• Vehicle rollover

Front air bags may not inflateThe front air bags may not inflate when theimpact is absorbed since the collisionobject moved, vehicle body deformed, orcollision angle was greater than about 30degrees from the front.

80J102

• Approximately 50 km/h (30 mph) orlower speed frontal collision to a stoppedvehicle

80J103

• Collision that the front of your vehiclegoes under the bed of a truck etc.

80J104

• Collision with a utility pole or stumpage

80J105E

• Collision with a fixed wall or guardrail atan angle of greater than about 30degrees (1) from the front

(1)

2-46

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

80J106

• In frontal collisions with a fixed wall thatdoes not move or deform in less thanabout 25 km/h (15 mph)

80J107

• Collision angle is offset from the vehicleangle (offset collision)

How the system worksIn a frontal collision, the crash sensors willdetect rapid deceleration, and if the con-troller judges that the deceleration rep-resents a severe frontal crash, thecontroller will trigger the inflators. The infla-tors inflate the air bags with nitrogen orargon gas. The inflated air bags provide acushion for your head and upper body. Theair bag inflates and deflates so quickly thatyou may not even realize that it has acti-vated. The air bag will neither hinder yourview nor make it harder to exit the vehicle.Air bags must inflate quickly and forcefullyin order to reduce the chance of serious orfatal injuries. However, an unavoidableconsequence of the quick inflation is thatthe air bag may irritate bare skin, such asthe facial area. Also, upon inflation, a loudnoise will occur and some powder andsmoke will be released. These conditionsare not harmful and do not indicate a fire inthe vehicle. Be aware, however, that someair bag components may be hot for a whileafter inflation.A seat belt helps to keep you in the properposition for maximum protection when anair bag inflates. Adjust your seat as farback as possible while still maintainingcontrol of the vehicle. Sit fully back in yourseat; sit up straight; do not lean over thesteering wheel or dashboard. Please referto the “Front Seat” section and the “SeatBelts and Child Restraint Systems” section

in this section for details on proper seatand seat belt adjustments.

65D610

2-47

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Note that even though your vehicle may bemoderately damaged in a frontal collision,the collision may not have been severeenough to trigger the air bags to inflate. Ifyour vehicle sustains ANY front-end dam-age, have the air bag system inspected byan authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop toensure it is in proper working order.Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosticmodule which records information aboutthe air bag system if the air bags deploy ina crash. The module records informationabout overall system status, which sensors

activated the deployment, and for a certainvehicle only, whether the driver’s seat beltwas in use.

Servicing the air bag systemIf the air bags inflate, have the air bagsand related components replaced by anauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop assoon as possible.If your vehicle ever gets in deep water andthe driver’s floor is submerged, the air bagcontroller could be damaged. If it does,have the air bag system inspected by theauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop assoon as possible.Special procedures are required for servic-ing or replacing an air bag. For that rea-son, only an authorized authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop should be allowed to ser-vice or replace your air bags. Pleaseremind anyone who services your vehiclethat it has air bags.Service on or around air bag componentsor wiring must be performed only by anauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.Improper service could result in unin-tended air bag deployment or could renderthe air bag inoperative. Either of these twoconditions may result in severe injury.To prevent damage or unintended inflationof the air bag system, be sure the batteryis disconnected and the ignition switch hasbeen in the “LOCK” position or the ignitionmode has been “LOCK” (OFF) for at least

90 seconds before performing any electri-cal service work on your Vehicle. Do nottouch air bag system components or wires.The wires are wrapped with yellow tape oryellow tubing, and the couplers are yellowfor easy identification.Scrapping a vehicle that has an uninflatedair bag can be hazardous. Ask your dealer,body repair shop or scrap yard for helpwith disposal.

WARNING• The driver should not lean over the

steering wheel. The front passen-ger should not rest his or her bodyagainst the dashboard, or other-wise get too close to the dash-board. In these situations, the out-of-position occupant would be tooclose to an inflating air bag, andmay suffer severe injury.

• Do not attach any objects to, orplace any objects over, the steeringwheel or dashboard. Do not placeany objects between the air bagand the driver or front passenger.These objects may interfere with airbag operation or may be propelledby the air bag in the event of acrash. Either of these conditionsmay cause severe injury.

2-48

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Instrument Cluster1. Speedometer2. Tachometer

3. Fuel gauge4. Temperature gauge5. Information display6. Trip meter selector knob

7. Indicator selector knob8. Warning and indicator lights

82PH016

6 2

8 3 5 4 8

8 1 7

EXAMPLE

2-49

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

SpeedometerThe speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

TachometerThe tachometer indicates engine speed inrevolutions per minute.

Fuel Gauge

82PH02033

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is “ON”, thisgauge gives an approximate indication ofthe amount of fuel in the fuel tank. “F”stands for full and “E” stands for empty.If the fuel meter indicator shows only onesegment to “E”, refill the tank as soon aspossible.

NOTE:If the last segment (3) blinks, it means thatthe fuel is almost empty.

If the low fuel warning light (1) comes on,fill the fuel tank immediately.

NOTE:The activation point of the low fuel warninglight (1) varies depending on road condi-tions (for example, slope or curve) anddriving conditions because of fuel movingin the tank.

Refer to “Low Fuel Warning Light” in“Warning and Indicator Lights” in this sec-tion for details.The mark (2) indicates that the fuel fillerdoor is located on the left side of the vehi-cle.

NOTICENever drive the vehicle with theengine revving in the red zone, orsevere engine damage can result.Keep the engine speed below the redzone even when downshifting to alower gear position. Refer to “Down-shifting maximum allowable speeds”in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE”section.

(1)

(2)(3)

EXAMPLE

2-50

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Temperature Gauge

82PH02037

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is “ON”, thisgauge indicates the engine coolant tem-perature. Under normal driving conditions,the indicator should stay within the normal,acceptable temperature range between“H” and “C”. If the indicator approaches“H”, overheating is indicated. When theengine overheats, the Engine CoolantTemperature Light (1) will be ON. Refer toEngine Coolant Temperature Light section.Follow the instructions for engine over-heating in the “EMERGENCY SERVICE”section.

Brightness Control

72PH02038

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the engine switch ispressed to change the ignition mode to“ON”, the instrument cluster lights comeon. Your vehicle has a system to automaticallydim the brightness of the instrument panellights when the position lights or headlightsare on. When the position lights and/or headlightsare “ON”, you can control the meter illumi-nation intensity.To increase the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the brightness con-trol knob (1) clockwise.To reduce the brightness of the instrumentpanel lights, turn the brightness controlknob (1) counterclockwise.

60MH025

NOTE:• If you do not turn the brightness control

knob within about 10 seconds of activat-ing the brightness control display, thebrightness control display will be can-celed automatically.If you want to exitbefore 10 seconds (auto exit) thenPress “Trip Meter Selector Knob” in thismode.

• When you reconnect the battery, thebrightness of the instrument panel lightswill be reinitialized. Readjust the bright-ness according to your preference.

NOTICEContinuing to drive the vehicle whenengine overheating is indicated canresult in severe engine damage.

(1)

EXAMPLE(1)

EXAMPLE

WARNINGIf you attempt to adjust the displaywhile driving, you could lose controlof the vehicle.Do not attempt to adjust the displaywhile driving.

EXAMPLE

2-51

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Multi-Colour Illumination Display

82PH02032

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the engine switch ispressed to change the ignition mode toON, the instrument panel lights come on.Your vehicle has a multi-colour illuminationdisplay. The colour of the instrument panelcan be selected from the five preset colour.To enter the colour change mode of instru-ment panel, rotate the indicator selectorknob in the clockwise or counter-clockwisedirection.The last selected colour will bedisplayed. To change the colour, press the indicatorselector knob.

82PH02031

When you have selected the colour of yourchoice, press the trip meter selector knobto exit the colour change mode.

NOTE:• If you do not press indicator selector

knob within about ten seconds of thecolor change, display will be canceledautomatically.

• When you reconnect the battery, thecolour of the instrument cluster will bereinitialized. Readjust the colour accord-ing to your preference.

Information Display

82PH069

Type A

82PH071


(1) (2)

(A)

(B)

(C)

(E)(D)

(3)

(F)

2-52

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Type B

82PH070

(1) Trip meter selector knob(2) Indicator selector knob(3) Information display

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is “ON”, theinformation display shows the followinginformation.Display (A)Fuel gaugeDisplay (B)Trip meter / Instantaneous / Average Fuelconsumption / Driving range Display (C)OdometerDisplay (D)Clock

Display (E)Gearshift indicator (if equipped)Display (F)Temperature gaugeDisplay (G)Parking sensor indication (if equipped)Display (H)Thermometer (if equipped)

Fuel GaugeWhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is “ON”, thedisplay (A) shows the fuel gauge.Refer to “Fuel Gauge” in this section.

(B)

(G)(E)(H)

(C)(D)

(3)

(A) (F)

2-53

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Trip Meter / Instantaneous / Average Fuel Consumption / Driving RangeWhen the ignition switch is in the “ON” position or the ignition mode is “ON”, the display(B) shows one of the indications described below.To switch the display indication (B), push the trip meter selector knob (1) or the indicatorselector knob (2) quickly.

82PM02001

EXAMPLE

(a)

(d)

(b)

(c)

(e)

(a) Trip meter A(b) Trip meter B(c) Instantaneous fuel consumption(d) Average fuel consumption(e) Driving range

NOTE:• Indications will change when you push

and release a knob.• The display shows estimated values.

Indications may not be the same asactual values.

Push the trip meter selectorknob (1).

Push the indicator selectorknob (2).


2-54

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Trip meter A (a) / Trip meter B (b)The trip meter can be used to measure thedistance traveled on short trips or betweenfuel stops.You can use the trip meter A or trip meter Bindependently.To reset the trip meter to zero, push andhold the trip meter selector knob (1) for awhile when the display shows the tripmeter.

NOTE:The indicated maximum value of the tripmeter is 9999.9. When you run past themaximum value, the indicated value willreturn to 0.0.

Instantaneous fuel consumption (c)The display shows the value of instanta-neous fuel consumption only when thevehicle is moving.

NOTE:• The display does not show the value

unless the vehicle is moving.• The indicated maximum value of instan-

taneous fuel consumption is 30. Nomore than 30 will be indicated on the dis-play even if the actual instantaneous fuelconsumption is higher.

• The indication on the display may bedelayed if fuel consumption is greatlyaffected by driving conditions.

• The display shows estimated values.Indications may not be the same asactual values.

• You can change the units that instanta-neous fuel consumption is displayed in.Refer to “Average fuel consumption” inthis section.

Average fuel consumption (d)If you selected average fuel consumptionthe last time you drove the vehicle, the dis-play shows the last value of average fuelconsumption from previous driving whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position or the engine switch is pressed tochange the ignition mode to “ON”. Unlessyou reset the value of average fuel con-sumption, the display indicates the value ofaverage fuel consumption which includesaverage fuel consumption during previousdriving.To reset the average fuel consumption tozero, push and hold the indicator selectorknob (2) for a while when the displayshows the average fuel consumption.

NOTE:When you reset the indication or reconnectthe negative (–) terminal to the battery, thevalue of average fuel consumption will beshown after driving for a while.

To change the unit of average fuel con-sumption, while pushing and holding thetrip meter selector knob (1), turn the indica-tor selector knob (2).

82PH024

NOTE:• When you change the units that average

fuel consumption is displayed in, theinstantaneous fuel consumption units willbe changed automatically.

• When you reconnect the negative (–)terminal to the battery, the unit of theaverage fuel consumption will be reini-tialized. Change the unit again to yourpreference.

EXAMPLE

(Initial setting)

2-55

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Driving range (e)If you selected driving range the last timeyou drove the vehicle, the display indicates“---” for a few seconds and then indicatesthe current driving range when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position or theengine switch is pressed to change theignition mode to “ON”.The driving range shown in the display isthe approximate distance you can driveuntil the fuel gauge indicates “E”, based oncurrent driving conditions.When the low fuel warning light comes on,the display “---” will appear.If the low fuel warning light comes on, fillthe fuel tank immediately regardless of thevalue of driving range shown in the display.As the driving range after refueling is cal-culated based on the most recent drivingcondition, the value is different each timeyou refuel.

NOTE:• If you refuel when the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position or the ignition mode is“ON”, the driving range may not indicatethe correct value.

• When you reconnect the negative (–)terminal to the battery, the value of driv-ing range will be shown after driving for awhile.

OdometerWhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is “ON”, thedisplay (C) shows the odometer. Theodometer records the total distance thevehicle has been driven.

ClockWhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is “ON”, thedisplay (D) shows the time.To change the time indication: 1) Push the trip meter selector knob (1)

and the indicator selector knob (2)together.

2) To change the hour indication, turn theindicator selector knob (2) left or rightrepeatedly when the hour indicationblinks. To change the hour indicationquickly, turn and hold the indicatorselector knob (2). To set the hour indi-cation, push the indicator selector knob(2) and the minute indication will blink.

3) To change the minute indication, turnthe indicator selector knob (2) left orright repeatedly when the minute indi-cation blinks. To change the minuteindication quickly, turn and hold theindicator selector knob (2). To set theminute indication, push the indicatorselector knob (2).

NOTICEKeep track of your odometer readingand check the maintenance sched-ule regularly for required services.Increased wear or damage to certainparts can result from failure to per-form required services at the propermileage intervals.


2-56

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

NOTE:When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-minal to the battery, the clock indication willbe reinitialized. Change the indicationagain to your preference.

Gearshift Indicator (if equipped)Refer to “Gearshift Indicator” in the“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.

Temperature GaugeWhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is “ON”, thedisplay (F) shows the Temperature gauge.Refer to “Temperature Gauge” in this sec-tion.

Parking Sensor IndicationRefer to “Parking Sensors” in the “OPER-ATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.

Thermometer (if equipped)When the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is “ON”, thedisplay (H) shows the thermometer.The thermometer indicates the outsidetemperature.

82PH025

If the outside temperature nears freezing,the mark (h) will appear on the display.

NOTE:• The outside temperature indication is not

the actual outside temperature whendriving at low speed, or when stopped.

• If there is something wrong with the ther-mometer, or just after the ignition switchis turned to the “ON” position or theengine switch is pressed to change theignition mode to “ON”, the display maynot indicate the outside temperature.

When the display (B) shows the drivingrange, you can change the unit of tem-perature.To change the unit of temperature, whilepushing and holding the trip meter selectorknob (1), turn the indicator selector knob(2).

82PH026

NOTE:When you change the unit that tempera-ture is displayed in, the automatic heatingand air conditioning system (if equipped)temperature display unit will be changedautomatically.

NOTE:When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-minal to the battery, the unit of temperaturewill be reinitialized. Change the unit againto your preference.

(h)

EXAMPLEEXAMPLE

(Initial setting)

2-57

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Setting ModeIn the setting mode, you can set up the following functions.

Indication FunctionsCentral door locking system “d1”

Automatic door locking function “d2”

Automatic door unlocking function “d3”

Door locking and unlocking siren “d5”

Footwell light settting “L1”

Additional flashes of the turn signal “L2”

2-58

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Security system “S1”

Shock sensor “S2”

Pre-warning sensitivity of the shock sensor “S3”

Full blast warning sensitivity of the shock sensor “S4”

Initialization setting “de-on”

Exit the setting mode “End”

Indication Functions

2-59

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

NOTE:Depending on vehicle’s specifications,some items may not be displayed.

How to operate the setting mode:1) Push and hold the indicator selector

knob (2) until the display shows “door”.2) Turn and/or push the indicator selector

knob (2) to select a function that youwant to set up according to the abovechart.

3) Turn and/or push the indicator selectorknob (2) to register settings of the fol-lowing functions.

Central door locking system “d1”• d1-SL1: Unlock all doors by turning the

key, pushing the keyless entrysystem transmitter, keylesspush start system remote con-troller or request switch once

• d1-SL2: Unlock all doors by turning thekey, pushing the keyless entrysystem transmitter, keylesspush start system remote con-troller or request switch twice(default setting)

Automatic door locking function “d2”• d2-SL1: Disable the automatic door

locking function• d2-SL2: Lock all doors when the vehicle

speed reaches 15 km/h(default setting)

Automatic door unlocking function “d3”• d3-SL1: Disable the automatic door

unlocking function (default set-ting of vehicle with keylesspush start system)

• d3-SL3: (Vehicle with keyless entry sys-tem) Unlock all doors when thekey is pulled out from the igni-tion switch (default setting ofvehicle with keyless entry)(Vehicle with keyless push startsystem) Unlock all doors whenthe ignition mode is “LOCK”(OFF)

Door locking and unlocking siren “d5”• d5-SL1: Siren sounds when the door(s)

is(are) locked or unlocked byusing the keyless entry systemtransmitter, keyless push startsystem remote controller orrequest switch (default setting)

• d5-SL2: Siren does not sound when thedoor(s) is(are) locked orunlocked by using the keylessentry system transmitter, key-less push start system remotecontroller or request switch

Footwell light setting “L1”• L1-SL1: Footwell light comes on when

any of doors is open or head-lights are on

• L1-SL2: Footwell light comes on whenany of doors is open (defaultsetting)

• L1-SL3: Disable the footwell light

Additional flashes of the turn signal “L2”• L2-SL1: Turn signal flashes three times

after the turn signal lever isreturned (default setting)

• L2-SL2: Disable the additional flashesof turn signal

Security system “S1”• S1-SL1: Enable the security system

(default setting)• S1-SL2: Disable the security system

Turn the indicator selector knob(2).

Push the indicator selectorknob (2).

2-60

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Shock sensor “S2”• S2-SL1: Enable the shock sensor• S2-SL2: Disable the shock sensor

(default setting)

Pre-warning sensitivity of the shock sensor “S3”• S3-L00: Disable the pre-warning• S3-L01 to L15:

Adjust the pre-warning sensitiv-ity of shock sensor (Lowestsensitivity level is L01 andhighest is L15, and default set-ting is L14)

Full blast warning sensitivity of the shock sensor “S4”• S4-L00: Disable the full blast warning• S4-L01 to L15:

Adjust the full blast warningsensitivity of shock sensor(Lowest sensitivity level is L01and highest is L15, and defaultsetting is L09)

Initialization setting “dEFAUL-on”• dEFAUL-on: Initialize all settings

76MH0017

NOTE:• As shown in the above illustration,

“ ” on the display indicates the cur-rent setting.

• To go back to the higher level displayduring operation, turn the indicatorselector knob (2) to display “bACK” or“-bAC” and then push the indicatorselector knob (2).

• If the security system “S1” is in the dis-abled state, the shock sensor “S2”, pre-warning sensitivity “S3” and full blastwarning sensitivity “S4” cannot be setup.

4) To exit the setting mode, switch the dis-play to show “End” and then push theindicator selector knob (2).

EXAMPLE

2-61

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Warning and Indicator LightsBrake System Warning Light

65D477

Three different types of operations existdepending on the vehicle’s specification.1) The light comes on briefly when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position or the engine switch is pressedto change the ignition mode to “ON”.

2) The light comes on when the parkingbrake is engaged with the ignitionswitch in the “ON” position or the igni-tion mode “ON”.

3) The light comes on when under eitheror both of above two conditions.

The light also comes on when the fluid inthe brake fluid reservoir falls below thespecified level.The light should go out after starting theengine and fully releasing the parkingbrake, if the fluid level in the brake fluidreservoir is adequate.

If your vehicle is equipped with the ABS,the brake system warning light also comeson together with the ABS warning lightwhen the rear brake force control function(proportioning valve function) of the ABSsystem fails.If the brake system warning light comes onwhile you are driving the vehicle, it maymean that there is something wrong withthe vehicle’s brake system. If this happens,you should:1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.

2) Test the brakes by carefully starting andstopping at the side of the road.

– If you determine that it is safe, drivecarefully at low speed to the nearestdealer for repairs, or

– Have the vehicle towed to the nearestdealer for repairs.

NOTE:Because the disc brake system is self-adjusting, the fluid level will drop as thebrake pads become worn. Replenishingthe brake fluid reservoir is considered nor-mal periodic maintenance.

NOTE:(Parking Brake Reminder Buzzer)A buzzer sounds intermittently to remindyou to release the parking brake if youstart the vehicle without releasing the park-ing brake. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and the brake sys-tem warning light turns off.

WARNINGRemember that stopping distancemay be longer, you may have to pushharder on the pedal, and the pedalmay go down farther than normal.

WARNINGIf any of the following conditionsoccur, you should immediately askyour authorised Maruti Suzuki work-shop to inspect the brake system.• If the brake system warning light

does not go out after the enginehas been started and the parkingbrake has been fully released.

• If the brake system warning lightdoes not come on when the igni-tion switch is turned to the “ON”position or the engine switch ispressed to change the ignitionmode to “ON”.

• If the brake system warning lightcomes on at any time during vehi-cle operation.

2-62

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light

60G049

When the driver doesn’t buckle his or herseat belt, this light will come on and/orblink.For details about the seat belt reminder,refer to “Seat Belts and Child RestraintSystems” in this section.

Air Bag Light

63J030

This light comes on for several secondswhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the engine switch ispressed to change the ignition mode to“ON” so you can check if the light is work-ing.The light will come on and stay on if thereis a problem in the air bag system or theseat belt pretensioner system (ifequipped).

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light (if equipped)

65D529

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the engine switch ispressed to change the ignition mode to“ON”, the light comes on briefly so you cancheck that the light is working.If the light stays on, or comes on whendriving, there may be something wrongwith the ABS.If this happens: 1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.2) Turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” or

change the ignition mode to“LOCK”(OFF) by pressing the engineswitch and then start the engine again.

If the warning light comes on briefly thenturns off, the system is normal. If the warn-ing light still stays on, there is somethingwrong with the ABS system.

WARNINGIf the air bag light does not blink orcome on briefly when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” positionor the engine switch is pressed tochange the ignition mode to “ON”,stays on for more than 10 seconds,or comes on while driving, the air bagsystem or the seat belt pretensionersystem (if equipped) may not workproperly. Have both systemsinspected by an authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.

2-63

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

If the light and the brake system warninglight stay on, or come on simultaneouslywhen driving, your ABS system isequipped with the rear brake force controlfunction (proportioning valve function) andthere may be something wrong with boththe rear brake force control function andanti-lock function of the ABS system.If one of these happens, have the systeminspected by your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop If the ABS becomes inoperative, the brakesystem will function as an ordinary brakesystem that does not have this ABS sys-tem.For details of ABS system, refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)” in the “OPER-ATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.

Malfunction Indicator Light

63J031

Your vehicle has a computer-controlledemission control system. A malfunctionindicator light is provided on the instrumentpanel to indicate when it is necessary tohave the emission control system serviced.The malfunction indicator light comes onwhen the ignition switch is turned to “ON”position or the engine switch is pressed tochange the ignition mode to “ON” to let youknow the light is working and goes outwhen the engine is started.If the malfunction indicator light comes onwhen the engine is running, there is adamage with the emission control system.Bring the vehicle to your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop to have the damagefixed.

Electric Power Steering Light

79J039

This light comes on when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position or theengine switch is pressed to change theignition mode to “ON”, and goes out whenthe engine is started.If this light comes on while driving, thepower steering system may not work prop-erly. Have the system inspected by yourauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

NOTE:Following operations of the steering wheelwhile parking or driving at a very low-speed may have steering effort biggergradually. This is not a malfunction of thesteering system, but the power steeringcontrol system limits the power assist inorder to prevent them from overheating.• The steering wheel is operated very

often.• The steering wheel is kept in a fully

turned position for a long while. When the power steering control systemcools down, the power steering system willreturn back to the original condition.

NOTICEContinuing to drive the vehicle whenthe malfunction indicator light is oncan cause permanent damage to thevehicle’s emission control system,and can affect fuel economy anddriveability.

2-64

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

However, repeating these operations couldcause damage to power steering system.

NOTE:If the power steering system does not workproperly, you will feel heavier to steer butyou still will be able to steer.

NOTE:If the steering is operated, you may hear anoise. This is normal and indicates that thepower steering system works properly.

Oil Pressure Light

50G051

This light comes on when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position or theengine switch is pressed to change theignition mode to “ON”, and goes out whenthe engine is started. If the light comes onwhile the engine is running, this indicatesthere is insufficient oil pressure. Pull off theroad as soon as you can and stop theengine. Check the oil level and add oil if necessary.If there is enough oil, the lubrication sys-tem should be inspected by your autho-rised Maruti Suzuki workshop before youdrive the vehicle again.

Charging Light

50G052

This light comes on when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position or theengine switch is pressed to change theignition mode to “ON”, and goes out whenthe engine is started. If the light comes onwhile the engine is running this indicatessome malfunction with the battery chargingsystem.The charging system should be inspectedimmediately by your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.

NOTICE• If you operate the engine with this

light on, severe engine damage canresult.

• Do not rely on the Oil PressureLight to indicate the need to addoil. Be sure to periodically checkthe engine oil level.

2-65

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light (red color)

54G344

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the engine switch ispressed to change the ignition mode to“ON”, this light comes on briefly so you cancheck that the light is working. If this lightblinks while driving, it means the engine isrunning hot. Avoid driving conditions thatmay lead to actual overheating. If the lightstays on without blinking, then the engineis overheating. Follow the instructions inthe “If the Engine Overheats” of “EMER-GENCY SERVICE” section.

Immobilizer System Light

65D239

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the engine switch ispressed to change the ignition mode to“ON”, the light comes on briefly so you cancheck that the light is working. If this lightstays on or blinks, there is a problem withthe system and the vehicle may not start.In such situations, have the vehicleinspected by your Maruti Suzuki autho-rised workshop.

Open Door Warning Light

54G391

This light remains on until all doors (includ-ing the tailgate) are completely closed.If any door (including the tailgate) is openwhen the vehicle is moving, a reminderwith ding sound comes along with open

door warning light to remind you to closeall doors completely.

Low Fuel Warning Light

54G343

If this light comes on, fill the fuel tankimmediately.When this light comes on, a reminder withding sounds once to remind you to fill thefuel.If you do not fill the fuel, a reminder withding sound comes every time when theignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-tion or the engine switch is pressed tochange the ignition mode to “ON”.

NOTE:The activation point of this light variesdepending on road conditions (for exam-ple, slope or curve) and driving conditionsbecause of fuel moving in the tank.

NOTICEContinuing to drive the vehicle whenengine overheating is indicated canresult in severe engine damage.

2-66

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Turn Signal Indicators

50G055

When you turn on the left or right turn sig-nals, the corresponding green arrow on theinstrument panel will flash along with therespective turn signal lights. When youturn on the hazard warning switch, botharrows will flash along with all of the turnsignal lights.

Main Beam (high beam) Indicator Light

50G056

This indicator comes on when headlightmain beams (high beams) are turned on.

Front Fog Light Indicator Light (if equipped)

82PH045

The front fog light indicator light comes onwhen the front fog light is ON.

Illumination Indicator Light (if equipped)

64J045

This indicator light comes on while theposition lights, tail light and/or the head-lights are on.

Fuel Filter Warning Light

60A541

This light comes on for several secondswhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the engine switch ispressed to change the ignition mode to“ON” so you can check the light is working.If the light comes on when driving, there isa possibility to have water in the fuel filter.Drain water as soon as possible. Fordetails of draining water, refer to “Fuel Fil-ter” in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTE-NANCE” section.

2-67

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Glow Plug Indicator Light

60A543

The light comes on when the ignition isswitched “ON” and the coolant tempera-ture is low. This light goes out when glowplug is heated enough to start the engine.

Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller Battery Consumption Warning Light (if equipped)

70K122

If the remote controller becomes unreli-able, this light comes on for several sec-onds when the engine switch is pressed tochange the ignition mode to “ON”.

PUSH Indicator Light (if equipped)

82K174

If this light comes on when clutch pedal isdepressed, you can start the engine.NOTE:For keyless push start system the lightblinks when you attempt to start the engineand the keyless push start system remotecontroller is not present inside the vehiclewhile cranking and vehicle can not bestarted.

“ACC” Indicator Light (if equipped)

82K097

This light comes on when the ignitionmode is “ACC”.

Ignition “ON” Indicator Light (if equipped)

82K098

This light comes on when the ignitionmode is “ON” with the engine off.

“CRUISE” Indicator Light (if equipped)

52D113

When the cruise control system is on, thislight will be on.

2-68

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

“SET” Indicator Light (if equipped)

65D474

When a cruising speed of the cruise con-trol is set, this light will be on.

Lighting Control Lever

65D611

Lighting Operation

60MK011

To turn the lights on or off, twist the knobon the end of the lever. There are threepositions:

OFF (1)All lights are off.

(2)Front position lights, tail lights, licenseplate light and instrument lights are on, butheadlights are off.

(3)Front position lights, tail lights, licenseplate light, instrument lights and headlightsare on.

WARNINGTo avoid possible injury, do not oper-ate controls by reaching through thesteering wheel.

(3)

(2)(1)

EXAMPLE

2-69

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

60MK012

With the headlights on, push the lever for-ward to switch to the high beams (mainbeams) or pull the lever toward you toswitch to the low beams. When the highbeams (main beams) are on, a light on theinstrument panel will come on. To momen-tarily activate the high beams (mainbeams) as a passing signal, pull the leverslightly toward you and release it when youhave completed the signal.

Automatic Lights Operation (if equipped)

82PH046

64MS060

EXAMPLE

(3) (4)

(2)(1)

EXAMPLE

(5)

2-70

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Your vehicle’s lighting system is controlled by two main systems: the Lighting switch andthe Auto-On Headlight System (when the lighting switch is in the “AUTO” position).The two systems work together to operate your lights as shown in the following chart:

ON: Lights ONLIGHT: When it is light around the light sensor (5).DARK: When it is dark around the light sensor (5).

Lighting switch posi-tion

Main lights to be operated

Ignition mode “LOCK” (OFF) or

“ACC”Ignition mode “ON”

LIGHT DARK LIGHT DARK

(1) OFFPosition lights, Tail lights – – – –

Headlights – – – –

(2) AUTOPosition lights, Tail lights – – – ON

Headlights – – – ON

(3) Position lights, Tail lights ON ON ON ON

Headlights – – – –

(4) Position lights, Tail lights ON ON ON ON

Headlights ON ON ON ON

To turn the lights on or off, twist the knobon the end of the lever. There are fourpositions:

OFF (1)All lights are off.

AUTO (2)This function works when the ignitionmode has been changed to “ON” by press-ing the engine switch. The headlights andposition lights are turned on and off auto-matically according to the amount of out-side light detected by a sensor. They goout automatically when you change theignition mode to “ACC” or “LOCK” (OFF)by pressing the engine switch.The light sensor (5) for sensing the amountof outside light is installed on the upperpart of the windshield. It also serves as therain sensor for the rain-sensing wipers.

2-71

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

NOTE:• Avoid covering the light sensor area of

the windshield with a sticker. The stickermay impair the performance of the sen-sor and make the system unable to con-trol operation of the lights correctly.

• If you changed the ignition mode to “ON”by pressing the engine switch and the“AUTO” position remains selected, theheadlights and position lights come onautomatically as the outside gets darkeven with the engine not running. Leav-ing the lights lit for a long time may leadto a completely discharged battery.

(3)Front position lights, tail lights, licenseplate light and instrument lights are on, butheadlights are off.

(4)Front position lights, tail lights, licenseplate light, instrument lights and headlightsare on.

82PH047

With the headlights on, push the lever for-ward to switch to the high beams (mainbeams) or pull the lever toward you toswitch to the low beams. When the highbeams (main beams) are on, a light on theinstrument panel will come on. To momen-tarily activate the high beams (mainbeams) as a passing signal, pull the leverslightly toward you and release it when youhave completed the signal.

Auto-on headlight system

64MS062

The Auto-on headlight system automati-cally turns on all lights that are operated bythe lighting control lever on the steeringcolumn, when the following three condi-tions are all met.Conditions for Auto-on headlight systemoperation:1) It is dark around the light sensor (5).2) The lighting control lever is in the

“AUTO” position.3) You press the engine switch to change

the ignition mode to “ON”.This system is operated by a signal fromthe light sensor (5) on the front windshield.Do not cover the sensor (5). If you do, thesystem will not work correctly.

CAUTIONIf the light sensor area of the wind-shield is covered with mud, ice, orother similar substances, the head-lights and position lights may beturned on even when it is still lightoutside. Before removing such sub-stances from the windshield, alwaysset the wiper control lever to the“OFF” position. If the lever is left inthe “AUTO” position, the wiperscould unexpectedly operate andcause injury, and could also be dam-aged.

EXAMPLE(5)

2-72

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

NOTE:The light sensor reacts even to infraredrays, so it may operate incorrectly whenthere are strong infrared rays.

Reprogramming the automatic lightfunctionThe following settings of the automaticlight function can be customized to yourpreference. Please contact an authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop if you want thefunction reprogrammed.

Sensitivity of the light sensorThe amount of outside light needed to turnthe lights on and off is pre-set at the fac-tory. The sensitivity of the light sensor canbe adjusted so that the lights are turned onand off when it is:• lighter outside than the pre-set condition,

or• darker outside than the pre-set condition

Rain-triggered automatic lighting oper-ationThe setting of the auto-on headlight sys-tem can be changed to make it turn on theheadlights:• when the rain sensor senses heavy rain-

fall• when the rain sensor senses light and

heavy rainfall (in coordination with rain-sensing wiper operation), or

• independently from rain-sensing wiperoperation.

Light Reminder BuzzerThe interior buzzer continuously beeps ifyou open the driver’s door without turningoff the headlights and position lights. Thisfunction is triggered under the followingcondition:The headlights and/or position lights areon even after the ignition switch is turnedoff, or the engine switch is pressed tochange the ignition mode to “LOCK”(OFF).The buzzer stops sounding when you turnoff the headlights and position lights.

Front Fog Light Switch (if equipped)

74LHT0226

The front fog light comes on when the foglight switch is twisted as shown in the illus-tration with the position lights, tail lightsand/or the headlights are on. The front fogindicator light will come on the speedome-ter when the front fog light is on.

WARNINGIt takes about 5 seconds for the lightsensor to react to a change in light-ing conditions. To help avoid an acci-dent due to reduced visibility, turn onyour headlights before driving into atunnel, parking structure or the like.

EXAMPLE

2-73

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Headlight Leveling Switch

80JM040

Level the headlight beam according to theload condition of your vehicle by turningthis switch. The chart below shows theappropriate switch position for differentvehicle-load conditions.

Turn Signal Control Lever

65D611

EXAMPLE

Vehicle Load Condition Switch Position

Driver only 0

Driver + 1 passenger (in front seat) 0

Driver + 4 passengers, no cargo 1

Driver + 4 passengers, cargo added 2

Driver + full cargo 3


2-74

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Turn Signal OperationWith the ignition switch in the “ON” positionor the ignition mode “ON”, move the leverup or down to activate the right or left turnsignals.

Normal turn signal

60MK013

Move the lever all the way upward ordownward to signal. When the turn is com-pleted, the signal will cancel and the leverwill return to its normal position.

Lane change signal

60MK014

Move the lever part-way in the direction toturn and hold it there.• The turn signal and its indicator flash

while the lever is held at the moved posi-tion.

The turn signal and its indicator flash threetimes even if you return the lever immedi-ately after moving it.

NOTE:The turn signal and its indicator can be setwhether they flash three times after theturn signal lever is returned via the infor-mation display. Refer to “Information Dis-play” in this section.

NOTE:You can customize the setting for the num-ber of times of flashing of the turn signaland its indicator (1 to 4 times). Please askan authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop forthe customization.

Hazard Warning Switch

82PH02015

Push in the hazard warning switch to acti-vate the hazard warning lights. All turn sig-nal lights and both turn signal indicatorswill flash simultaneously. To turn off thelights, push the switch again.Use the hazard warning lights to warnother traffic during emergency parking orwhen your vehicle could otherwise becomea traffic hazard.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

2-75

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever

65D611

Wiper and Washer OperationWhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is “ON”, youcan use the wiper/washer lever or switch (ifequipped).

Windshield Wipers

76MH0A049

To turn the windshield wipers on, move thelever down to one of the three operatingpositions. In the “INT” position, the wipersoperate intermittently. The “INT” position isvery convenient for driving in mist or lightrain. In the “LO” position, the wipers oper-ate at a steady low speed. In the “HI” posi-tion, the wipers operate at a steady highspeed. To turn off the wipers, move thelever back to the “OFF” position.Move the lever up and hold it to the “MIST”position, the windshield wipers will turn oncontinuously at low speed.

Windshield Wipers with Rain Sens-ing Function (if equipped)

64MS065

Press the engine switch to change the igni-tion mode to “ON”. To turn the rain-sensingwipers on, move the lever down to one ofthe three operating positions. In the“AUTO” position (if provided), the wipersautomatically operate when the wiper sys-tem senses rain or snow. In the “LO” posi-tion, the wipers operate at a steady lowspeed. In the “HI” position, the wipersoperate at a steady high speed. To turn offthe wipers, move the lever back to the“OFF” position.Move the lever up and hold it to the “MIST”position; the wipers will operate continu-ously at low speed for as long as you holdthe lever in the “MIST” position.


EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

MIST

HI

OFF

LO

AUTO

EXAMPLE

2-76

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

64MS066

If the control lever has an “AUTO” position,you can change the system’s sensitivity torain/snow by turning the knob of the con-trol lever forward (+) for increased sensitiv-ity or rearward (–) for decreasedsensitivity.

61M0219

(1) Rain sensor

NOTE:• Under the following conditions, the rain

sensor may not be able to sense rain orsnow correctly, and thus the rain-sensingwiper function may not work or may workincorrectly. (Use a position other than“AUTO” under these conditions.)– Rain or snow does not hit the rain sen-

sor area of the windshield, or the snowis not of a type that is able to bedetected by the sensor.

– The rain sensor area is covered withmud, ice or other similar substance.You should remove any foreign sub-stance.

– There were already raindrops on thewindshield before starting rain-sensingwiper operation. You should removethe raindrops by operating the wipersunder manual control.

– The rain sensor is hotter than 80°C(176°F) in the sun or lower than –10°C(14°F) in freezing weather. (The wip-ers do not operate under this condi-tion.)

– The windshield is coated with a water-repellent substance, which causesraindrops to run down quickly. This willgive a clearer view and the wipersmay seem to operate too frequently. Inthis case, decrease the system’s sen-sitivity.

– The sensor area is covered with asticker.

– The wiper blades are damaged. Youshould replace them.

– The vehicle is running on bad roadconditions.

• The following conditions may indicateproblems with the rain-sensing wipersystem. If your system exhibits any ofthe following conditions, have itinspected by an authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.– Rainfall/snowfall rate varies but the

wiping interval remains constant.– Rain/snow is falling but the wipers do

not operate.

EXAMPLE

(1)

CAUTION• Observe the following instructions

when the wiper lever is set to the“AUTO” position with the engineswitch in the “ON” mode. Other-wise, the wipers could unexpect-edly operate and cause injury, andcould also be damaged.– Do not touch or wipe the rain

sensor area of the windshieldwith a cloth.

– Do not hit the windshield or rainsensor.

• Be sure to set the wiper controllever to the “OFF” position beforewashing the vehicle in an auto-matic car wash or cleaning thewindshield.

2-77

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Reprogramming the rain-sensing wiperfunctionThe AUTO position operation of the rain-sensing wiper function can be customizedto your preference by reprogramming itssetting as follows. Please contact anauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for thiscustomization.

Full-automatic wiping (factory setting)The system automatically selects the mostappropriate of the following wiping modes:no wiping, intermittent wiping, low-speedwiping, and high-speed wiping.

Semi-automatic wipingThe system automatically selects the mostappropriate of the following wiping modes:intermittent wiping, low-speed wiping, orhigh-speed wiping. (In this mode, the wip-ers do not stop automatically.)

Intermittent wipingThe wipers operate only in the intermittentwiping mode. The wiping interval can bechanged with the knob on the control lever.

Windshield Washer

76MH0A050

To spray windshield washer fluid, pull thelever toward you. The windshield wiperswill automatically turn on at low speed ifthey are not already on and the “INT” /“AUTO” position is equipped.

WARNING• To prevent windshield icing in cold

weather, turn on the defroster toheat the windshield before andduring windshield washer use.

• Do not use radiator antifreeze inthe windshield washer reservoir. Itcan severely impair visibility whensprayed on the windshield, and canalso damage your vehicle’s paint.

EXAMPLE

NOTICETo help prevent damage to the wind-shield wiper and washer systemcomponents, you should take the fol-lowing precautions:• Do not continue to hold in the lever

when there is no windshieldwasher fluid being sprayed or thewasher motor can be damaged.

• Do not attempt to remove dirt froma dry windshield with the wipers oryou can damage the windshieldand the wiper blades. Always wetthe windshield with washer fluidbefore operating the wipers.

• Clear ice or packed snow from thewiper blades before using the wip-ers.

• Check the washer fluid level regu-larly. Check it often when theweather is bad.

• Only fill the washer fluid reservoir3/4 full during cold weather to allowroom for expansion if the tempera-ture falls low enough to freeze thesolution.

2-78

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch (if equipped)

76MH0A051

To turn the rear wiper on, twist the rearwiper switch on the end of the lever for-ward to the “ON” position. To turn the rearwiper off, twist the switch rearward to the“OFF” position.With the rear wiper in the “OFF” position,twist the switch rearward and hold it thereto spray window washer fluid.With the rear wiper in the “ON” position,turn the switch forward and hold it there tospray window washer fluid.

Tilt Steering Lock Lever

74LHT0333

The lock lever is located under the steeringcolumn. To adjust the steering wheelheight:1) Push down the lock lever to position (2)

to unlock the steering column.2) Adjust the steering wheel to the desired

height and lock the steering column bypulling up the lock lever to position (1).

3) Try moving the steering wheel up anddown to make sure it is securely lockedin position.

Washer

Wiper

EXAMPLE

NOTICEClear ice or snow from the rear win-dow and rear wiper blade beforeusing the rear wiper. Accumulatedice or snow could prevent the wiperblade from moving, causing damageto the wiper motor.

WARNINGNever attempt to adjust the steeringwheel height while the vehicle ismoving or you could lose control ofthe vehicle.

EXAMPLE

2-79

BEFORE DRIVING

82PH0-74E

Horn

82PH02017

Press the horn button of the steering wheelto sound the horn. The horn will sound withthe ignition switch in any position.

Heated Rear Window Switch (if equipped)

82PH02010

When the rear window is misted, push thisswitch (1) to clear the window.An indicator light will be lit when the defog-ger is on. The defogger will work onlywhen the engine is running. To turn off thedefogger, push the switch again.

NOTE:• The defogger will work only when the

engine is running.• The defogger will automatically turn off

after the defogger remains on for 15 min-utes to prevent discharging of the bat-tery.

SRS AIRBAG

EXAMPLE

NOTICEThe heated rear window uses a largeamount of electricity. Be sure to turnoff after the window has becomeclear.

USC

AUTO

AC

OFF

TEMP

MODE

(1)

EXAMPLE

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

3

82PH0-74E

60MHMT3001

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLEExhaust Gas Warning ......................................................... 3-1Daily Inspection Checklist .................................................. 3-1Engine Oil Consumption .................................................... 3-2Ignition Switch (Vehicle without Keyless Push Start System) .................. 3-3Engine Switch(Vehicle with Keyless Push Start System) ........................ 3-5Keyless Push Start System (if equipped) ......................... 3-6Parking Brake Lever ........................................................... 3-9Pedal ..................................................................................... 3-10Starting the Engine (Vehicle without Keyless Push Start System) .................. 3-11Starting the Engine (Vehicle with Keyless Push Start System) ........................ 3-12Using the Transaxle ............................................................ 3-15Gearshift Indicator (if equipped) ........................................ 3-16Cruise Control (if equipped) ............................................... 3-17Parking Sensors (if equipped) ........................................... 3-19Rearview Camera (if equipped) .......................................... 3-25Braking ................................................................................. 3-28

3-1


82PH0-74E

Exhaust Gas Warning

52D334

Daily Inspection ChecklistBefore Driving

60A187S

1) Make sure that windows, mirrors, lights,and reflectors are clean and unob-structed.

2) Visually check the tires for the followingpoints:

– the depth of the tread groove– abnormal wear, cracks and damage– loose wheel nuts– existence of foreign material such as

nails, stones, etc.Refer to “Tires” in “INSPECTION ANDMAINTENANCE” section for details.3) Look for fluid and oil leaks.

WARNINGAvoid breathing exhaust gases.Exhaust gases contain carbon mon-oxide, a potentially lethal gas that iscolorless and odorless. Since carbonmonoxide is difficult to detect byitself, be sure to take the followingprecautions to help prevent carbonmonoxide from entering your vehicle.• Do not leave the engine running in

garages or other confined areas.(Continued)

WARNING(Continued)• Do not park with the engine run-

ning for a long period of time, evenin an open area. If it is necessary tosit for a short time in a parked vehi-cle with the engine running, makesure the air intake selector is set tothe fresh air position and the fan isat high speed.

• Avoid operating the vehicle withthe tailgate or trunk open. If it isnecessary to operate the vehiclewith the tailgate or trunk open,make sure the sunroof (if equipped)and all windows are closed, and theblower is at high speed with the airintake selector set to the fresh airposition.

• To allow proper operation of yourvehicle’s ventilation system, keepthe air inlet grille in front of thewindshield clear of snow, leaves, orother obstructions at all times.

• Keep the exhaust tailpipe area clearof snow and other material to helpreduce the buildup of exhaustgases under the vehicle. This isparticularly important when parkedin blizzard conditions.

• Have the exhaust system inspectedperiodically for damage and leaks.Any damage or leaks should berepaired immediately.

3-2


82PH0-74E

NOTE:It is normal for water to drip from the airconditioning system after use.

4) Make sure the hood is fully closed andlatched.

5) Check the headlights, turn signal lights,brake lights and horn for proper opera-tion.

6) Adjust the seat and head restraint(if equipped).

7) Check the brake pedal and the parkingbrake lever.

8) Adjust the mirrors.9) Make sure that you and all passengers

have properly fastened your seat belts.10)Make sure that all warning lights come

on as the key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion or the engine switch is pressed tochange the ignition mode to ON.

11)Check all gauges.12)Make sure that the BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING light turns off when the park-ing brake is released.

Once a week, or each time you fill your fueltank, perform the following under-hoodchecks:1) Engine oil level2) Coolant level3) Brake fluid level4) Windshield washer fluid level5) Battery solution level6) Hood latch operation

Pull the hood release handle inside the

vehicle. Make sure that you cannotopen the hood all the way withoutreleasing the secondary latch. Be sureto close the hood securely after check-ing for proper latch operation. See “Alllatches, hinges & locks” of “CHASSISAND BODY” in the “Periodic Mainte-nance Schedule” in the “INSPECTIONAND MAINTENANCE” section for lubri-cation schedule.

Once a month, or each time you fill yourfuel tank, check the tire pressure using atire pressure gauge. Also check the tirepressure of the spare tire.

Engine Oil ConsumptionIt is normal for the engine to consumesome engine oil during normal vehicleoperation.The amount of engine oil consumeddepends on the viscosity of the oil, thequality of the oil and the conditions thevehicle is driven under.More oil is consumed during high-speeddriving and when there is frequent acceler-ation and deceleration. Under high loads,your engine also will consume more oil.A new engine also consumes more oil,since its pistons, piston rings and cylinderwalls have not yet become conditioned.New engines reach the normal level of oilconsumption only after approximately5000 km driving.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km

When judging the amount of oil consump-tion, note that the oil may become dilutedand make it difficult to accurately judge thetrue oil level.As an example, if a vehicle is used forrepeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may notshow any drop in the oil level at all, evenafter 1000 km or more of driving. This isbecause the oil is gradually becomingdiluted with fuel or moisture, making itappear that the oil level has not changed.

WARNINGMake sure the hood is fully closedand latched before driving. If it is not,it can fly up unexpectedly duringdriving, obstructing your view andresulting in an accident.

3-3


82PH0-74E

You should also be aware that the dilutingingredients evaporate out when the vehicleis subsequently driven at high speeds,such as on an expressway, making itappear that oil is excessively consumedafter high-speed driving.

Ignition Switch (Vehicle without Keyless Push Start System)

65D611

52KM052

The ignition switch has the following fourpositions:

LOCKThis is the normal parking position. It is theonly position in which the key can beremoved.WARNING

To avoid possible injury, do not oper-ate controls by reaching through thesteering wheel.

EXAMPLE

3-4


82PH0-74E

60G033

You must push in the key to turn it to the“LOCK” position. It locks the ignition, andprevents normal use of the steering wheelafter the key is removed.

To release the steering lock, insert the keyand turn it clockwise to one of the otherpositions. If you have trouble turning thekey to unlock the steering, try turning thesteering wheel slightly to the right or leftwhile turning the key.

ACCAccessories such as the radio can oper-ate, but the engine is off.

ONThis is the normal operating position. Allelectrical systems are on.

STARTThis is the position for starting the engineusing the starter motor. The key should bereleased from this position as soon as theengine starts.

Ignition key reminderA buzzer sounds intermittently to remindyou to remove the ignition key if it is in theignition switch when the driver’s door isopened.

81A297S

Turn to “LOCK”

Push

WARNING• Never return the ignition switch to

“LOCK” position and remove theignition key while the vehicle ismoving. The steering wheel willlock and you will not be able tosteer the vehicle.

• Always return the ignition switch to“LOCK” position and remove theignition key when leaving the vehi-cle even if only for a short time.Also do not leave children alone ina parked vehicle. Unattended chil-dren could cause accidental move-ment of the vehicle or could tamperwith power windows. They alsocould suffer from heat stroke inwarm or hot weather. These couldresult in severe injury or evendeath.

3-5


82PH0-74E

Engine Switch(Vehicle with Keyless Push Start System)

82PH03001

LOCK (OFF)This mode is for parking the vehicle. Whenthis mode is selected by pressing theengine switch and then any door (includingthe tailgate) is opened or closed, the steer-ing will be locked automatically.

ACCPress the engine switch to select this igni-tion mode to use such electric equipmentas the audio system, outside rearview mir-rors accessory socket, etc. with the engineoff. When this position is selected, the“ACC” indicator light in the instrument clus-ter comes on. Refer to “Warning and Indi-cator Lights” in the “BEFORE DRIVING”section for details.

ON• With the engine off

You can use such electric equipment asthe power windows and wipers with theengine off. When this ignition mode isselected by pressing the engine switch,the ignition “ON” indicator light in theinstrument cluster will come on.

• With the engine onAll electric equipment is operational. Thevehicle can be driven when you haveselected this ignition mode by pressingthe engine switch.

STARTProvided you have the keyless push startsystem remote controller with you, theengine automatically starts when youpress the engine switch to select this igni-tion mode after shifting to “N” (Neutral) anddepressing the brake and clutch pedals.

NOTICE• Do not use the starter motor for

more than 30 seconds at a time. Ifthe engine does not start, wait 15seconds before trying again. If theengine does not start after severalattempts, check the fuel and igni-tion systems or consult yourMARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

• Do not leave the ignition switch inthe “ON” position if the engine isnot running as the battery will dis-charge.

SRS AIRBAG

100 1203 4

5

EXAMPLE

3-6


82PH0-74E

NOTE:You do not need to keep the engine switchpressed to start the engine.

NOTE:• The steering lock may not be released if

some load is acting on the steeringwheel. If this happens, turn the steeringwheel to the right or left to relieve it fromthe load before you press the engineswitch again to change to the desiredignition mode.

• In the presence of strong radio signals ornoise, you may not be able to changethe ignition mode to “ACC” or “ON” or tostart the engine using the engine switch.

Keyless Push Start System (if equipped)Provided the keyless push start systemremote controller is within the “interiorworkable area” (refer to the related expla-nation in this section), you can use theengine switch for starting the engine andselecting an ignition mode (“ACC” or“ON”). In addition, the following functionscan be used:• Keyless entry function. Refer to “Keyless

Push Start System Remote Controller” inthe “BEFORE DRIVING” section fordetails.

• Locking and unlocking doors (includingthe tailgate) using a request switch.Refer to “Keyless Push Start SystemRemote Controller” in the “BEFOREDRIVING” section for details.

• Immobilizer (anti-theft) function. Refer to“Immobilizer System” in the “BEFOREDRIVING” section for details.

Engine Switch IlluminationThe engine switch is illuminated (lit) in thefollowing situations:• When the engine is off and the driver’s

door is open, or for 15 seconds after thedriver’s door is closed. The illuminationwill fade out after the 15 seconds past.

• When the engine is off and the positionlights are on. The illumination will go outwhen the position lights are turned off.

• When the engine is on and the positionlights and/or the headlights are on. Theillumination will go out when the positionlights and/or the headlights are turnedoff.

82K253

NOTE:To save the battery, the illumination will beautomatically turned off when both of thefollowing conditions are simultaneouslymet:• The headlights and position lights are

turned off.• A period of 15 minutes has elapsed after

opening the driver’s door.

Selection of Ignition ModesPress the engine switch to select the“ACC” or “ON” mode as follows when youuse an electric accessory or check theoperation of instruments without runningthe engine. 1) Bring the keyless push start system

remote controller with you and sit in thedriver’s seat.

NOTICEDo not leave the engine switch in the“ACC” or “ON” mode when theengine is not running. Avoid usingthe radio or other electric accesso-ries for a long time when the engineswitch is in the “ACC” or “ON” modewhen the engine is not running, oth-erwise the battery may discharge.

3-7


82PH0-74E

2) Without depressing the clutch pedal,press the engine switch (1).

82K254

Every time you press the engine switch,the ignition mode changes as follows.

68PH00322

If the “PUSH” indicator light blinks andthe ignition modes cannot be selectedYour keyless push start system remote con-troller may not be sensed as being within the“interior workable area” (refer to the relatedexplanation in this section). Try again aftermaking sure you have the remote controllerwith you. If the ignition modes still cannot beselected, the battery of the remote controller

may be discharged. To be able to select anignition mode, you must then use the follow-ing method:

58MST0302

1) Without depressing the brake pedaland the clutch pedal, push the engineswitch (1).

2) Within about 10 seconds during whichthe “PUSH” indicator light in the instru-ment cluster is blinking, touch theengine switch with the “LOCK” buttonend of the remote controller (2) forabout 2 seconds.

NOTE:• If you still cannot select the ignition

modes, there may be some problemswith the keyless push start system. Con-tact an authorized MARUTI SUZUKIdealer for an inspection of the system.

• The immobilizer keyless push start sys-tem warning system light will come onfor about 5 seconds while the “PUSH”indicator light is blinking. Refer to “Warn-ing and Indicator Lights” in the “BEFOREDRIVING” section for details.

• You may customize the system to causethe interior buzzer to sound once for the“remote controller out of sensing range”warning. To incorporate this customiza-tion, please contact an authorizedMARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

• If the battery of the remote controller isabout to become completely discharged,the keyless push start system remotecontroller battery consumption warninglight in the instrument cluster will comeon for a few seconds when you press theengine switch to change the ignitionmode to “ON”. Refer to “Warning andIndicator Lights” in the “BEFORE DRIV-ING” section for details. For details onreplacing the battery, refer to the “Key-less Push Start System Remote Control-ler” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section.

(1)

(OFF) (Audio equipment)

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

3-8


82PH0-74E

“Remote Controller Outside” Warn-ingWhen either of the conditions describedbelow is met, the system issues the remotecontroller outside warning by sounding theinterior and exterior buzzers. At the sametime, the immobilizer system light blinks.• Any door is opened and then closed

while the remote controller is not insidethe vehicle and the engine is running orthe ignition mode has been changed to“ACC” or “ON” by pressing the engineswitch.

• The remote controller is not inside thevehicle when you attempt to start theengine after changing the ignition modeto “ACC” or “ON” by pressing the engineswitch.

82PH048

(1) Immobilizer keyless push start systemwarning light (blinks)

NOTE:• If the warning is given, locate the remote

controller as soon as possible.• Any attempt to start the engine will fail

while the warning is active. Blinking ofthe immobilizer keyless push start sys-tem warning light in the instrument clus-ter will indicate this condition. Refer to“Warning and Indicator Lights” in the“BEFORE DRIVING” section for details.

• Normally, the immobilizer keyless pushstart system warning light should stopblinking shortly after the remote control-ler is brought back inside the vehicle. Ifthe immobilizer keyless push start sys-tem warning light does not stop blinking,change the ignition mode to “LOCK”(OFF) by pressing the engine switch andthen perform the engine starting opera-tion. Refer to “Starting the Engine” in thissection.

• Always keep the remote controller withyou as the driver.

Interior Workable Area for Engine Starting, Ignition Mode Selection and Remote Controller Outside Warning

61MM0B002

(1) Interior workable area

The “interior workable area” for these func-tions is defined as all the interior spacesexcept for the space above the instrumentpanel.

(1)

(1)

3-9


82PH0-74E

NOTE:• Even when the remote controller is in the

interior workable area, if it is in any of thefollowing conditions, you may not beable to start the engine or select the igni-tion modes, and the “remote controlleroutside” warning may be given.– The remote controller’s battery is low.– The remote controller is affected by

strong radio signals or noise.– The remote controller is in contact with

or covered by a metallic object.– The remote controller is in stowage

like the glove box or a door pocket.– The remote controller is in the sun

visor pocket or on the floor.• Even when the remote controller is out-

side the interior workable area, if it is inany of the following conditions, you maybe able to start the engine or select theignition mode. The “remote controlleroutside” warning may not be given atthat time.– The remote controller is outside the

vehicle but very close to a door.– The remote controller is on the instru-

ment panel.

Parking Brake Lever

60MHM03001

(1) To set(2) To release(3) To release

The parking brake lever is located betweenthe seats. To set the parking brake, holdthe brake pedal down and pull the parkingbrake lever all the way up. To release theparking brake, hold the brake pedal down,pull up slightly on the parking brake lever,push the button on the end of the leverwith your thumb, and lower the lever to itsoriginal position.

(2)

(3)

(1)EXAMPLE

WARNING• Never drive your vehicle with the

parking brake on: rear brake effec-tiveness can be reduced from over-heating, brake life may beshortened, or permanent brakedamage may result.

• If the parking brake does not holdthe vehicle securely or does notfully release, have your vehicleinspected immediately by an autho-rized MARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

WARNINGAlways set the parking brake fullybefore leaving your vehicle or it maymove, causing injury or damage.When parking, make sure the gear-shift lever is in reverse or first gear.Remember, even though the tran-saxle is in gear, you must set theparking brake fully.

3-10


82PH0-74E

Parking Brake Reminder BuzzerA buzzer sounds intermittently to remindyou to release the parking brake if youstart the vehicle without releasing the park-ing brake. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and the brake sys-tem warning light turns off.

Pedal

80J2121

Clutch Pedal (1) The clutch pedal is used to disengage thedrive to the wheels when starting theengine, stopping, or shifting the gearshiftlever. Depressing the pedal disengagesthe clutch.

Brake Pedal (2)Your MARUTI SUZUKI vehicle is equippedwith front disc brakes and rear drumbrakes. Depressing the brake pedalapplies both sets of brakes.You may hear occasional brake squealwhen you apply the brakes. This is a nor-mal condition caused by environmentalfactors such as cold, wet, snow, etc.

Accelerator Pedal (3)This pedal controls the speed of theengine. Depressing the accelerator pedalincreases power output and speed.

WARNINGWhen parking the vehicle inextremely cold weather, the followingprocedure should be used:1) Set the parking brake.2) Turn off the engine, then shift into

reverse or first gear.3) Get out of the vehicle and put

chocks under the wheels.4) Release the parking brake.

When you return to your vehicle,you must remember to first set theparking brake, then remove thewheel chocks.

WARNINGDo not drive with your foot resting onthe clutch pedal. It could result inexcessive clutch wear, clutch dam-age, or unexpected loss of enginebraking.

(2)(1)

(3)

EXAMPLE

WARNINGIf brake squeal is excessive andoccurs each time the brakes areapplied, you should have the brakeschecked by your MARUTI SUZUKIdealer.

WARNINGDo not “ride” the brakes by applyingthem continuously or resting yourfoot on the pedal. This will result inoverheating of the brakes whichcould cause unpredictable brakingaction, longer stopping distances, orpermanent brake damage.

3-11


82PH0-74E

Starting the Engine (Vehicle without Keyless Push Start System)Before Starting the Engine

82PH006

1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully.2) Shift into “N” (Neutral) and depress the

clutch pedal all the way to the floor.Hold the clutch pedal while starting theengine.

NOTE:The engine of a manual transaxle vehiclewill not start unless the clutch pedal isdepressed.

Starting a Cold and Warm EngineCold engineTurn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-tion and wait until the glow plug indicatorgoes out if it comes on. Crank the engineby turning the ignition key to “START”.Release the key when the engine starts.

Warm engineCrank the engine by turning the ignitionkey to “START”. Release the key when theengine starts.

Caution when stopping the engine withturbochargerWhen stopping the engine after climbing orhigh speed driving, let the engine idle forabout one minute or more (if it is not pro-hibited) to cool down the turbocharger andengine oil. This is to prevent the engine oilfrom over-deteriorating. Deterioratedengine oil will damage the bearings of theturbocharger.

Restarting diesel engine after fuel-empty stopIf the engine stops and the low fuel warn-ing light and the malfunction indicator lightcome on, use the following procedure:1) Fill the fuel tank.2) Hold the ignition key in “ON” position for

5–10 seconds to feed fuel.3) Perform above engine starting proce-

dure to start the engine.If the malfunction indicator light still comeson after the engine started, there may besome problem with the engine. Ask yourMARUTI SUZUKI dealer to have theengine inspected.

WARNINGMake sure that the parking brake isset fully and the transaxle is in Neu-tral before attempting to start theengine.

NOTICE• Stop turning the starter immedi-

ately after the engine has started orthe starter system can be damaged.

• Do not crank the engine for morethan 30 seconds at a time. If theengine doesn’t start on the first try,wait about 15 seconds before try-ing again.

3-12


82PH0-74E

Starting the Engine (Vehicle with Keyless Push Start System)Before Starting the Engine

82PH007

1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully.2) Shift to “N” (Neutral) and fully depress

the clutch pedal. Hold the clutch andbrake pedals fully depressed.

82K254

3) The “PUSH” indicator light in the instru-ment cluster will come on. Push theengine switch (1). When the engine isstarted, the starter motor will automati-cally stop.

NOTE:• You do not need to keep the engine

switch pressed to start the engine.• The engine of a manual transaxle vehi-

cle will not start unless the clutch pedalis depressed.

• You should turn off such loads as theheadlights and air conditioning system tofacilitate starting of the engine.

• Even if you fail to start the engine, thestarter motor will stop turning automati-cally after a short time. After the startermotor has stopped or if there is someproblem with the system, the startermotor will rotate only while the engineswitch is being pressed.

WARNINGMake sure that the parking brake isset fully and the transaxle is in Neu-tral before attempting to start theengine.

(1)

NOTICE• Do not depress the accelerator

during the engine starting proce-dure.

• If the engine does not respondwhen you try to start it with theengine switch or if the engineswitch repeats cycling through the“LOCK” (OFF) - “ACC” - “ON”mode, the vehicle battery may bedischarged. Check the voltage ofthe vehicle battery before tryingagain.

3-13


82PH0-74E

Stopping the Engine• Depress the engine switch to stop the

engine after the vehicle stopped com-pletely.

• In case of emergency, you can stop theengine by quickly pushing the engineswitch more than 3 times, or pushingand holding the engine switch more than2 seconds while the vehicle in motion.

NOTE:Except in emergency, do not stop theengine while the vehicle in motion.The steering and braking operation willrequire more efforts when the enginestopped.Refer to “Braking” in this section.

• If the engine has been stopped andstayed as it as for while after the enginewas stopped unexpectedly or was racedbefore stopped, a clicking sound may beheard from around the engine whenengine restarted. This is not a malfunc-tion. In this case, always let the engineidle before stop it.

Starting a Cold and Warm EngineCold engineDepress the clutch and brake pedals fullyand press the engine switch to crank theengine. If the glow plug indicator lightcomes on, the engine will start automati-cally after the glow plug indicator light goesoff or 10 seconds past.

Warm engineCrank the engine by pressing the engineswitch to change the ignition mode to“START”.

Caution when stopping the engine withturbochargerWhen stopping the engine after climbing orhigh speed driving, let the engine idle forabout one minute or more (if it is not pro-hibited) to cool down the turbocharger andengine oil. This is to prevent the engine oilfrom over-deteriorating. Deterioratedengine oil will damage the bearings of theturbocharger.

Restarting diesel engine after fuel-empty stopIf the engine stops and the low fuel warn-ing light and the malfunction indicator lightcome on, use the following procedure:1) Fill the fuel tank.2) Press the engine switch to change the

ignition mode to “ON” for 5-10 secondsto feed fuel.

3) Perform above engine starting proce-dure to start the engine.

If the malfunction indicator light still comeson after the engine started, there may besome problem with the engine. Ask yourMARUTI SUZUKI dealer to have theengine inspected.

If the “PUSH” indicator light blinks andthe engine cannot be startedYour keyless push start system remotecontroller may not be sensed as beingwithin the interior workable area. Try againafter making sure that you have the remotecontroller with you. If the engine still can-not be started, the battery of the remotecontroller may be discharged. You mustthen use the following method to be able tostart the engine.

NOTICEDo not crank the engine for morethan 30 seconds at a time. If the engine doesn’t start on the firsttry, wait about 15 seconds before try-ing again.

3-14


82PH0-74E

58MST0302

1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully.2) Shift to “N” (Neutral) and fully depress

the clutch pedal. Hold the clutch andbrake pedals fully depressed.

3) The “PUSH” indicator light in the instru-ment cluster will come on. Press theengine switch (1).

4) Within about 10 seconds of blinking ofthe “PUSH” indicator light in the instru-ment cluster, touch the engine switchwith the “LOCK” button end of theremote controller (2) for about 2 sec-onds.

NOTE:• If you still cannot start the engine after

several attempts using the abovemethod, there may be a problem else-where, such as a low battery. Contactyour MARUTI SUZUKI dealer for inspec-tion.

• The immobilizer keyless push start sys-tem warning light will come on for about5 seconds while the “PUSH” indicatorlight is blinking.

• You may customize the system to causethe interior buzzer to sound once for the“remote controller out of sensing range”warning. Please contact an authorizedMARUTI SUZUKI workshop for the cus-tomisation.

• If the battery of the remote controller isabout to be completely discharged, thekeyless push start system remote con-troller battery consumption warning lightin the instrument cluster will come on fora few seconds when the ignition mode ischanged to ON by pressing the engineswitch. For details on replacing the bat-tery, refer to the “Keyless Push StartSystem Remote Controller” in the“BEFORE DRIVING” section.

Returning the Ignition Mode to LOCK (OFF)LOCK (OFF) mode reminder buzzer If the driver’s door is opened withoutreturning the ignition mode to “LOCK”(OFF) by pressing the engine switch, abuzzer sounds to warn you of this state.• If you open the driver’s door after press-

ing the engine switch to change the igni-tion mode to “ACC”, the interior buzzerbeeps intermittently.

• The buzzer will stop sounding if you thenpush the engine switch twice, thus bring-ing it back the ignition mode to “LOCK”(OFF).

NOTE:Whenever you leave the vehicle, makesure you have returned the ignition modeto “LOCK” (OFF) using the engine switchand then lock the doors. Without returningthe ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF), youcannot use a request switch or keylesspush start system remote controller to lockthe doors.

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

3-15


82PH0-74E

Steering lock warning buzzerIf the steering lock fails to engage due to afault in the system when the ignition modeis turned to “LOCK” (OFF) by pressing theengine switch and then any door (includingthe tailgate) is opened or closed, the inte-rior buzzer will warn you of this conditionwith repeated short beeps. If this happens,have the vehicle inspected by an autho-rized MARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

Using the TransaxleManual Transaxle

79MH0303

Starting offTo start off, depress the clutch pedal all theway to the floor and shift into 1st gear.After releasing the parking brake, graduallyrelease the clutch. When you hear achange in the engine’s sound, slowly pressthe accelerator while continuing to gradu-ally release the clutch.

ShiftingAll forward gears are synchronized, whichprovides for quiet and easy shifting.Always push in the clutch pedal fullybefore shifting gears. Keep the enginespeed so it does not vise into the red zoneof the tachometer.

Downshifting maximum allowable speeds

*NOTE:You may not accelerate to the maximumallowable speed because of the driving sit-uation and/or the vehicle condition.

Keep the engine speed so it does not getinto the red zone of tachometer.

Downshifting km/h

2nd to 1st 35

3rd to 2nd 65

4th to 3rd 100

5th to 4th 145

NOTICEWhen downshifting to a lower gear,make sure not to downshift at thespeed faster than the maximumallowable speeds, or severe enginedamage can result.

3-16


82PH0-74E

Gearshift Indicator (if equipped)

82PH064

(1) Gearshift indicatorIn the following cases, the gearshift indica-tor is indicated on the information displaywhile the vehicle is running.• When the gearshift lever is in a position

other than “N” (Neutral).• For vehicles equipped with the cruise

control, when the system is not in use.

The electronic control system monitorsdriving condition (such as vehicle speedand/or engine revolution), and it showswhich gear position is optimal for your driv-ing with the indication on the display.If UP/DOWN arrow is indicated on the dis-play while driving, we recommend you toshift up or down the gear until the arrowgoes off. It is the optimal gear position for adriving condition that reduces the over rev-olution and stress to the engine, andimproves fuel consumption.For details on how to use the transaxle,refer to “Using the Transaxle” in this sec-tion.

WARNING• Reduce your speed and downshift

to a lower gear before going downa long or steep hill. A lower gearwill allow the engine to providebraking. Avoid riding the brakes orthey may overheat, resulting inbrake failure.

• When driving on slippery roads, besure to slow down before down-shifting. Excessive and/or suddenchanges in engine speed maycause loss of traction, which couldcause you to lose control.

NOTICEMake sure that the vehicle is com-pletely stationary before you shiftinto reverse.

NOTICE• To help avoid clutch damage, do

not use the clutch pedal as a foot-rest while driving or use the clutchto keep the vehicle stationary on aslope. Depress the clutch fullywhen shifting.

• When shifting or starting off, do notrace the engine. Racing the enginecan shorten engine life and affectsmooth shifting.

(1)

EXAMPLE

WARNINGThe gearshift indicator is designed toindicate optimal gear position foryour driving, however, a driver willnot be relieved from the duty of careof driving operation or gear changewith this indicator.To drive safe, do not gaze the gear-shift indicator, pay attention to yourdriving situation and shift up or downif necessary.

3-17


82PH0-74E

NOTE:• The gearshift indicator is not indicated

when the gear position is in “N” (Neutral).• If you depress the clutch pedal while UP/

DOWN arrow is indicated, the indicationwill disappear.

• If you release your foot from the acceler-ator pedal while UP arrow is indicated,the UP arrow will go off.

• The indication of gearshift indicator tim-ing may differ depending on the vehiclecondition and/or driving situation even inthe same vehicle speed and engine rev-olution.

Example of the gearshift indicator

Cruise Control (if equipped)The cruise control system allows you tomaintain a steady speed without keepingyour foot on the accelerator pedal. Thecontrols for operating the cruise controlsystem are on the steering wheel.You can use the cruise control system withthe following conditions:• The gear position is in 3rd, 4th or 5th.• The vehicle speed is about 40 km/h or

higher.

61MS416

(1) “CRUISE” switch(2) “CANCEL” switch(3) “RES +” switch(4) “SET –” switch

Indi-cation Description

Lower gear position is selected for the vehicle speed and/or engine revolution. Changing to a higher gear position is recom-mended.

Current gear position is optimal for the vehicle speed and/or engine revolution.

Higher gear position is selected for the vehicle speed and/or engine revolution. Changing to a lower gear position is recom-mended.

WARNINGTo help avoid loss of vehicle control,do not use the cruise control systemwhen driving in heavy traffic, on slip-pery or winding roads, or on steepgradient.

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

3-18


82PH0-74E

To Set Cruising Speed1) Turn on the cruise control system by

pushing the “CRUISE” switch (1). Whenthe “CRUISE” indicator light comes on,you can set cruising speed.

2) Accelerate or decelerate to the desiredspeed.

3) Push the “SET –” switch (4) and turn onthe “SET” indicator light. Take your footoff the accelerator pedal and the setspeed will be maintained.

“CRUISE” Indicator Light

52D113

When you push the “CRUISE” switch, thesystem is on and a “CRUISE” indicatorlight on the instrument cluster comes on.

“SET” Indicator Light

65D474

When the vehicle’s speed is controlled bythe cruise control system, a “SET” indica-tor light on the instrument cluster comeson.

To Change Speed TemporarilyWhen the cruising speed is maintained,you can temporarily accelerate or deceler-ate.

To accelerate, depress the acceleratorpedal. When you take your foot off thepedal, your vehicle will return to the setspeed.

To decelerate, depress the brake pedal.The set speed will be canceled and “SET”indicator light will go off.To resume the previously set speed, pushthe “RES +” switch (3) and “SET” indicatorlight will be turned ON again when vehiclespeed is above 40 km/h. The vehicle willaccelerate to and maintain the previouslyset speed.

WARNINGIf the cruising speed is set by acci-dentally set, you cannot decelerate orcould loose control of the vehicle.This could lead to an accident, result-ing in severe injury or death.Turn off the cruise control systemand make sure the “CRUISE” indica-tor light is off when the system is notin use.

3-19


82PH0-74E

To Change Cruising SpeedUsing the accelerator pedalTo reset at a faster cruising speed, accel-erate to the desired speed using the accel-erator pedal and push the “SET –” switch(4). The new speed will be maintained.

Using the brake pedalTo reset at a slower cruising speed, decel-erate to the desired speed using the brakepedal and push the “SET –” switch (4). Thenew speed will be maintained.

NOTE:When the brake pedal is depressed, the“SET” indicator light goes off until reset thecruising speed.

Using the “RES +” switch or the “SET –”switchTo reset at a faster cruising speed, pressrepeatedly or hold push the “RES +” switch(3). Vehicle speed will steadily increase.When you release the switch, the newspeed will be maintained.To reset at a slower cruising speed, pressrepeatedly or hold push the “SET –” switch(4) until the vehicle has slowed to thedesired speed, then release the switch.The new speed will be maintained.

NOTE:You can adjust the set speed by approxi-mately 1.6 km/h by pushing the “RES +”switch (3) or the “SET –” switch (4) quickly.

Cancellation of the Cruise ControlThe “SET” indicator light will go off and thecruise control will be cancelled temporarilywith following procedures:• Push the “CANCEL” switch (2).• Depress the brake pedal.• Depress the clutch pedal. • The vehicle speed falls more than about

20 percent from the set speed.• Any time the vehicle speed falls below

40 km/h.To resume the previously set speed, pushthe “RES +” switch (3) and “SET” indicatorlight will be turned ON Besides, the vehiclespeed has to be above 40 km/h when thevehicle is not in the above conditions.To turn off the cruise control system, pushthe “CRUISE” switch (1) and make surethe “CRUISE” indicator light is off.Also, if the malfunction indicator light in theinstrument cluster comes on or blinks, thecruise control system will be turned off.

NOTE:If you turn off the cruise control system, thepreviously set speed in the memory iscleared. Reset your cruising speed again.

Parking Sensors (if equipped)

82PH03009

(1) Symbol representing an obstacledetected by parking sensor** This symbol represents an obstacle

that is located to the right rear ofthe vehicle.

• The parking sensor system uses ultra-sonic sensors to detect obstacles nearthe rear bumper. If obstacles are sensedwhile you are parking or moving thevehicle slowly / In reverse gear, the sys-tem warns you by sounding a buzzerand displaying symbols representing theobstacles on the information display inthe instrument cluster.

• The system emits an ultrasonic waveand the relevant sensor detects thereturn of the wave reflected by an obsta-cle. The system measures the timetaken by the ultrasonic wave to reach theobstacle and return from it, from which itdetermines the obstacle’s position.

• The parking sensor function can be usedwhen you turn the ignition switch to the“ON” position or press the engine switch

(1)

EXAMPLE

3-20


82PH0-74E

to change the ignition mode to ON, thegearshift lever is in “R” position and theparking sensor switch is in the ON posi-tion. This function is helpful in the follow-ing cases: pulling over to the curb;parallel-parking the vehicle; steering thevehicle into a garage; driving along analley; and moving slowly in a place withobstacles.

Sensor LocationsOn the rear bumper

82PH03002

(1) Rear center sensors (2 places) (2) Rear corner sensors (2 places)

Working sensorsThe sensors that work depends on theposition of the gearshift lever as follows:

Approximate areas where obstacles canbe detected

82PH03003

• The sensors can detect an obstacle upto about 1.5 m (5 ft) from the rear ofvehicle.

NOTE:An obstacle within about 20 cm (8 in) froma sensor or just below a sensor may not bedetectable.

WARNING• The parking sensor warns you of

obstacles with buzzers and byshowing you the location of theobstacles on the information dis-play. However, you must still payfull attention yourself while driving.

• The sensors can detect obstaclesonly within a limited area and onlywhen the vehicle is moving within alimited speed range. So, in trickyareas, you must move the vehicleslowly while checking around itusing your direct vision or rearviewmirrors. There is increased risk ofan accident if you control the vehi-cle relying only on the parking sen-sor.

NOTICE• Parking sensor are only for driver’s

assistance.

NOTICE• Avoid hitting the sensor areas or

directing the nozzle of a high-pres-sure car washer onto the sensorareas. Otherwise, the sensors maybe damaged.

• If the bumper hits a hard object, thesensors on it may not work prop-erly. If this occurs, have the sen-sors inspected by an authorizedMARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

(1)(2) (1) (2)

EXAMPLEGearshift lever

position R N, 1st – 5th

Rear sensors

Center On OffCorner On Off

EXAMPLE

3-21


82PH0-74E

NOTE:• Thin poles or obstacles lower than the

sensors may become undetectable asthe vehicle moves closer to them even ifthey have been detected from longerdistances.

• The system may calculate the distanceto a road sign or similar obstacle to beshorter than the actual distance.

WARNING• Under the following conditions, the

parking sensor system may notwork normally because the sensorscannot detect obstacles correctly.– Sensors are covered with mud,

ice or other materials. (Suchmaterials must be removed fornormal operation.)

– Sensors are wet from watersplashes or heavy rain.

– Sensors are covered by a hand,sticker, accessory, etc.

– There is an accessory or otherobject attached within the sen-sor’s sensing area.

– Items such as tow hooks, com-mercially available corner poles,radio antenna, etc. are installedon the bumper.

– The height of the bumper ischanged due to alteration to thesuspension or other causes.

– The sensor areas are extremelyhot from direct sunlight or colddue to freezing weather.

– The vehicle is on a rough sur-face, slope, gravel road or grassfield.

– The vehicle is at a steep angle.(Continued)

WARNING(Continued)

– Sensors have intercepted ultra-sonic noise from another vehi-cle’s horn, engine, air brakingsystem (large vehicles), or park-ing sensor.

– Obstacles are too close to thesensors.

– Sensors are at an angle to ahighly reflective object such asglass. (Ultrasonic waves are notreflected back from the obstacle.)

• Sensors may not be able to cor-rectly detect the following types ofobstacles:– Objects made of a thin material

like wire netting and ropes– Square-shaped curbstones or

other objects with sharp edges– Tall objects with a large upper

part like a road sign– Low-profile objects such as curb-

stones– Sound-absorbing objects such

as cotton and snow

3-22


82PH0-74E

How to Use the Parking SensorParking sensor switch

61MS403

(1) Parking sensor switch(2) Indicator

(2)

(1)

• When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position or the ignition mode is ON, and the indi-cator light in the parking sensor switch is on, indicating that the parking sensor is readyfor operation under the following conditions:– The gearshift lever is in “R” position.– The vehicle’s forward moving speed is not more than approx. 9 km/h when deacceler-

ating the vehicle such as for parking.– The vehicle’s forward moving speed is not more than approx. 13 km/h when accelerating.

• To deactivate the parking sensor, push the parking sensor switch and make sure theindicator light goes off.

NOTE:If you push the parking sensor switch from the OFF to ON position when the ignitionswitch has been turned to the "ON" position or the ignition mode has been changed to ONby pressing the engine switch, the inside buzzer sounds.

Switch position State

EXAMPLEON• When the indicator light is on and all necessary conditions are

met, system becomes ready for operation.

EXAMPLEOFF• The system does not operate. Push the switch to turn off the

indicator if you do not wish to use the parking sensor.

3-23


82PH0-74E

Obstacle Indication by Parking Sen-sor

82PH063

(1) Obstacle detected by rear center sen-sors

(2) Obstacle detected by rear corner sen-sors

(2) (1) (2)

EXAMPLE

Upon detecting an obstacle, the parking sensor causes an interior buzzer to sound and asymbol representing the obstacle appears on the information display in the instrumentcluster.• A different symbol is displayed depending on the direction and distance of the obstacle.• A buzzer sounds when a sensor at the rear detects an obstacle.• Warnings when obstacles are detected by corner sensors

• Warnings when obstacles are detected by center sensors

NOTE:• Symbols are displayed with a short delay after the detection of obstacles.• If the system detects multiple obstacles simultaneously, the display shows all of their

positions using the corresponding symbols. However, the buzzers will sound only forthe nearest obstacles.

Distance (approx.) Buzzer Symbol45 – 60 cm(18 – 24 in) Short beeps at short intervals Three lines

35 – 45 cm(14 – 18 in) Short beeps at very short intervals Two lines

Less than 35 cm(14 in) Continuous beep One line

Distance (approx.) Buzzer Symbol60 – 150 cm(24 – 59 in) Short beeps at long intervals

Three lines45 – 60 cm(18 – 24 in) Short beeps at short intervals

35 – 45 cm(14 – 18 in) Short beeps at very short intervals Two lines

Less than 35 cm (14 in) Continuous beep One line

3-24


82PH0-74E

Warning and Indicator MessagesIf there is a problem or warning regarding the parking sensor system, a message is displayed on the information display in the instrumentcluster, and a symbol blinks and the buzzer sounds. If a message is displayed, follow its instruction.

Text Message Symbol Buzzer Probable cause and remedy

82PH03011Two Blinking lines in a sensor location.

Series of Dou-ble Beeps

There may be some problem with the parking sensor system.Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized MARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

82PH03012 One blinking line in a sensor location.

Series of Sin-gle Beeps

The indicated sensor is contami-nated.Clean the sensor with a soft cloth.

No text indication

All line blinking in sensor location.

No Buzzer Beeps

There may be some problem with the parking sensor system.Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized MARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

82PH03013

82PH03014

82PH03015

3-25


82PH0-74E

Rearview Camera (if equipped)When the gearshift lever is shifted to the“R” position while the ignition mode is“ON”, the rearview camera system auto-matically shows the view behind the vehi-cle on the display.

Rearview Camera Location

82PH03004

(1) Rearview cameraThe rearview camera is installed besidethe license plate light.

WARNINGThe distance viewed in the rearviewcamera may differ from the actualdistance according to the conditionof road or the load the vehicle is car-rying. Since the camera display areais also limited, backing up by onlylooking at the display may cause anaccident or a collision with an object.The rearview camera cannot replacethe driver’s attention. The driveralone is responsible for parking andsimilar driving maneuvers.• Use the rearview camera only to

provide driving assistance.• Always drive carefully confirming

the safety of the rear and the sur-rounding conditions by lookingdirectly with your eyes and usingthe rear view mirror.

• Make sure that the tailgate issecurely closed when backing up.

NOTICEIf you use the rearview camera for along time when the ignition mode isON, but the engine is not running, thebattery may discharge.Do not leave the ignition mode ON fora long time when the engine is notrunning.

NOTICEThe rearview camera is a precisioninstrument. If you strike the camera,it may be broken and cause damageresulting in a catching fire or a mal-function.• Do not strike the camera.• Do not remove snow or mud on the

camera lens with a stick.

(1)EXAMPLE

3-26


82PH0-74E

NOTE:If body wax does get on the camera lens,wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-ened with mild detergent diluted withwater, then wipe with a dry cloth.

How to Use Rearview Camera1) Press the engine switch to change the

ignition mode to ON.2) Shift the gearshift lever in the “R” posi-

tion.• The display automatically shows the

view behind the vehicle.• When the gearshift lever is shifted

from “R” to another gearshift leverposition, the display returns to theprevious display.

NOTE:The rearview camera display has first pri-ority in any display mode. However, therearview camera display does not showthe rear view while the system is initializ-ing.

Display Range of Rearview CameraThe rearview camera display shows thearea behind the rear end of the tailgate.The display cannot show objects which areclose to the bumper or under the bumper.The rearview camera display cannot showobstacles which are higher than the cam-era. Upper parts of tall objects such asroad signs cannot be viewed on the dis-play.

Example of display range of rearviewcamera

82PH03005

82PH03006

(1) Display range

NOTICEIf water enters the rearview camera, itmay cause a malfunction or catchingfire.Do not use high pressure wateraround the camera.

NOTICEThis lens is hard coated to preventdamage or discoloration. Damage ordiscoloration of lens may obscurethe image.• Do not use a brush to clean lens.• Do not use alcohol, benzene or

thinner to clean the lens.• Do not use wax on the camera lens.

EXAMPLE

(1)

EXAMPLE(1)

3-27


82PH0-74E

NOTE:• Images shown on the display from the

rearview camera are reversed images(mirror images).

• The colors of objects on the rearviewcamera may differ from the actual objectcolors.

• The rearview camera display may be dif-ficult to see under the following condi-tions, but this is not a systemmalfunction.– In dark areas, on a rainy day or at

night.– When the temperature around the lens

is too high/low, or the camera is wetsuch as on a rainy day or during peri-ods of high humidity (dew condensa-tion may occur on the camera lens).

– When a foreign object such as mud ora drop of water is stuck around thecamera lens.

– When strong light directly enters thecamera (vertical lines may be seen onthe display).

– Under fluorescent light. (The displaymay flicker.)

– When the outside temperature is low(the image on the display may bedarkened).

Example of rearview camera screenindicationThe distance viewed in the rearview cam-era may differ from the actual distanceaccording to the condition of the road orthe load the vehicle is carrying.

Uphill Incline behind the Vehicle

82PH03007

(1) Object(2) Actual distance(3) Distance on the display

When there is an uphill incline behind thevehicle, the object shown on the displayappears farther away than the actual dis-tance.

Downhill Incline behind the vehicle

82PH03008

(1) Object(2) Actual distance(3) Distance on the display

When there is a downhill incline behind thevehicle, the object shown on the displayappears closer than the actual distance.

EXAMPLE

(3)

(2)

(1)

EXAMPLE

(1)

(3)

(2)

3-28


82PH0-74E

If the rear view from the rearview cam-era is not shown or there is a poorimage• If the rear view from the rearview camera

is not shown.– Check to make sure that the ignition

mode is ON.– Check to make sure that the gearshift

lever is shifted to the “R” position.

• If the image from the rearview camera ispoor.– Check to make sure that the camera

lens is not dirty.– Check to make sure that light from the

sun or the beam of the headlights fromthe vehicle behind is not shiningdirectly into the lens.

If the rearview camera system is still notworking properly after checking the above,have the system inspected by an autho-rized MARUTI SUZUKI dealer as soon aspossible.

Braking

60G165S

The distance needed to bring any vehicleto a halt increases with the speed of thevehicle. The braking distance needed, forexample, at 60 km/h will be approximately4 times greater than the braking distanceneeded at 30 km/h. Start to brake the vehi-cle when there is plenty of distancebetween your vehicle and the desired stop-ping point, and slow down gradually.

EXAMPLEWARNING

If water gets into the brake drums,brake performance may become poorand unpredictable. After driving through water or wash-ing the underside of the vehicle, testthe brakes while driving at a slowspeed to see if they have maintainedtheir normal effectiveness. If thebrakes are less effective than normal,dry them by repeatedly applying thebrakes while driving slowly until thebrakes have regained their normaleffectiveness.

3-29


82PH0-74E

Power-Assisted BrakesYour vehicle has power-assisted brakes. Ifpower assistance is lost due to a stalledengine or other failures, the system is stillfully operational on reserve power and youcan bring the vehicle to a complete stop bypressing the brake pedal once and holdingit down. The reserve power is partly usedup when you depress the brake pedal andreduces each time the pedal is pressed.Apply smooth and even pressure to thepedal. Do not pump the pedal.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) (if equipped)ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec-tronically controlling braking pressure. Itwill also help you maintain steering controlwhen braking on slippery surfaces or whenbraking hard.The ABS works automatically, so you donot need any special braking technique.Just push the brake pedal down withoutpumping. The ABS will operate wheneverit senses that the wheels are locking up.You may feel the brake pedal moves a littlewhile the ABS is operating.

NOTE:The ABS will not work if vehicle speed isunder about 10 km/h.

WARNINGEven without reserve power in thebrake system, you can still stop thevehicle by pressing the brake pedalharder than normally required. How-ever, the stopping distance may belonger.

3-30


82PH0-74E

63J081

(1) ABS warning light(2) Brake system warning light

WARNING• On some types of loose surfaces

(such as gravel, snow-coveredroads, etc.) the stopping distancerequired for an ABS-equipped vehi-cle may be slightly greater than fora comparable vehicle with a con-ventional brake system. With a con-ventional brake system, skiddingtires are able to plow the gravel orsnow layer, shortening the stop-ping distance, ABS minimizes thisresistance effect. Allow for extrastopping distance when driving onloose surfaces.

• On regular paved roads, some driv-ers may be able to obtain slightlyshorter stopping distances withconventional brake systems thanwith ABS.

• In both of the above conditions,ABS will still offer the advantage ofhelping you maintain directionalcontrol. However, remember thatABS will not compensate for badroad or weather conditions or poordriver judgment. Use good judg-ment and do not drive faster thanconditions will safely allow.

WARNING• If the ABS warning light (1) on the

instrument panel comes on andstays on while driving, there maybe a problem with the ABS system.Ask your MARUTI SUZUKI dealer toinspect the ABS system immedi-ately. If the ABS system becomesinoperative, the brake system willfunction as an ordinary brake sys-tem that has no ABS.

(Continued)

(1)(2)

WARNING(Continued)• If the ABS warning light (1) and the

Brake system warning light (2) onthe instrument panel simultane-ously stays on or comes on whendriving, both anti-lock function andrear brake force control function(proportioning valve function) ofthe ABS system may have failed. Ifso, the rear wheels may easily skidor the vehicle can even spin in theworst case when braking on a slip-pery road or when hard brakingeven on a dry paved road. Ask yourMARUTI SUZUKI dealer to inspectthe ABS system immediately. Drivecarefully, avoiding hard braking asmuch as possible.

3-31


82PH0-74E

How the ABS WorksA computer continuously monitors wheelspeed. The computer compares thechanges in wheel speed when braking. Ifthe wheels slow suddenly, indicating askidding situation, the computer willchange braking pressure several timeseach second to prevent the wheels fromlocking. When you start your vehicle after astop you may hear a momentary motornoise as the system checks itself.

WARNINGThe ABS may not work properly iftires or wheels other than thosespecified in the owner’s manual areused. This is because the ABS worksby comparing changes in wheelspeed. When replacing tires orwheels, use only the size and typespecified in this owner’s manual.

DRIVING TIPS

4

82PH0-74E

60G409

DRIVING TIPSRunning-in ........................................................................... 4-1Catalytic Converter ............................................................. 4-1Improving Fuel Economy ................................................... 4-2Highway Driving .................................................................. 4-3Driving on Hills .................................................................... 4-3Driving on Slippery Roads ................................................. 4-4Driving on Wet Roads ......................................................... 4-5Do’s and Dont’s for Safe Driving ........................................ 4-6Margin for Safety.................................................................. 4-8

4-1

DRIVING TIPS

82PH0-74E

67LM4001

Running-in Catalytic Converter

80G106

The purpose of the catalytic converter is tominimize the amount of harmful pollutantsin your vehicle’s exhaust. Use of leadedfuel in vehicles equipped with catalyticconverters is prohibited, because leaddeactivates the pollutant-reducing compo-nents of the catalyst system.The converter is designed to last the life ofthe vehicle under normal usage and whenunleaded fuel is used. No special mainte-nance is required on the converter. How-ever, it is very important to keep the engineproperly tuned. Engine misfiring, which canresult from an improperly tuned engine,may cause overheating of the catalyst.This may result in permanent heat damageto the catalyst and other vehicle compo-nents.

WARNING• WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS AT ALL

TIMES. Even though air bags areequipped at the front seating posi-tions, the driver and all passengersshould be properly restrained at alltimes, using the seat belts pro-vided. Refer to the “Seat Belts andChild Restraint Systems” sectionfor instructions on proper use ofthe seat belts.

• Never drive while under the influ-ence of alcohol or other drugs.Alcohol and drugs can seriouslyimpair your ability to drive safely,greatly increasing the risk of injuryto yourself and others. You shouldalso avoid driving when you aretired, sick, irritated, or understress.

EXAMPLENOTICE

The future performance and reliabil-ity of the engine depends on the careand restraint exercised during itsearly life. It is especially important toobserve the following precautionsduring the initial 960 km of vehicleoperation.• After starting, do not race the

engine. Warm it up gradually.• Avoid prolonged vehicle operation

at a constant speed. Moving partswill break in better if you vary yourspeed.

• Start off from a stop slowly. Avoidfull throttle starts.

• Avoid hard braking, especiallyduring the first 320 km of driving.

• Do not drive slowly with the tran-saxle in a high gear.

• Drive the vehicle at moderateengine speeds.

• Do not tow a trailer.

EXAMPLE

4-2

DRIVING TIPS

82PH0-74E

54G584S

Improving Fuel EconomyThe following instructions will help youimprove fuel economy.Avoid excessive idlingIf you are to wait for more than a minutewhile you are parked, stop the engine andstart it again later. When warming up acold engine, do not allow the engine to idleor apply full throttle until the engine hasreached operating temperature. Allow theengine to warm up by driving.Avoid sudden accelerationSudden acceleration starting from rest orwhile driving will consume fuel unneces-sarily and shorten engine life. Start offslowly.Avoid unnecessary stopsAvoid unnecessary deceleration and stop-ping. Try to maintain a slow, steady speedwhenever possible. Slowing down andthen accelerating again uses more fuel.Keep a steady cruising speedKeep as constant a speed as road andtraffic conditions will permit.

NOTICETo minimise damaging the catalyst orother vehicle damage:• Maintain the engine in the proper

operating condition.• In the event of an engine malfunc-

tion, particularly one involvingengine misfiring or other apparentloss of performance, have the vehi-cle serviced promptly.

• Do not turn off the engine or inter-rupt the ignition when the transaxleis in gear and the vehicle is inmotion.

• Do not try to start the engine bypushing or towing the vehicle, orcoasting down a hill.

• Do not idle the vehicle for pro-longed periods if idling seemsrough or there are other malfunc-tions.

• Do not allow the fuel tank to getnear the empty level.

• Avoid driving your vehicle atexcessively high engine speed inor around the red zone of thetachometer.

WARNINGBe careful about where you park anddrive; the catalytic converter andother exhaust components can getvery hot. As with any vehicle, do notpark or operate this vehicle in areaswhere combustible materials such asdry grass or leaves can come in con-tact with a hot exhaust system.

EXAMPLE

4-3

DRIVING TIPS

82PH0-74E

Keep the air cleaner clean

60A183S

If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, therewill be greater intake resistance, resultingin decreased power output and increasedfuel consumption.Keep weight to a minimumHeavier the load, more fuel the vehicleconsumes. Take out any luggage or cargowhen it is not necessary.Keep tire pressures correctUnderinflation of the tires can waste fueldue to increased running resistance of thetires. Keep your tires inflated to the correctpressure shown on the label on the driver’sdoor lock pillar.

Highway DrivingWhen driving at high speeds, pay attentionto the following:• Stopping distance progressively

increases with vehicle speed. Apply thebrakes far enough ahead of the stoppingpoint to allow for the extra stopping dis-tance.

• On rainy days, hydroplaning can occur.Hydroplaning is the loss of direct contactbetween the road surface and the vehi-cle’s tires due to a water film formingbetween them. Steering or braking thevehicle while hydroplaning can be verydifficult, and loss of control can occur.Keep speed down when the road sur-face is wet.

• At high speeds, the vehicle may beaffected by side winds. Therefore,reduce speed and be prepared for unex-pected buffeting, which can occur at theexits of tunnels, when passing by a cutof a hill, or when being overtaken bylarge vehicles, etc.

Driving on Hills

82PH008

• When climbing steep hills, the vehiclemay begin to slow down and show a lackof power. If this happens, you shouldshift to a lower gear so that the enginewill again be operating in its normalpower range. Shift rapidly to prevent thevehicle from losing momentum.

• When driving down a hill, the engineshould be used for braking by shiftinginto a lower gear.

EXAMPLE

WARNINGTry not to hold the brake pedal downtoo long or too often while goingdown a steep or long hill. This couldcause the brakes to overheat, result-ing in reduced braking efficiency.Failure to take this precaution couldresult in loss of vehicle control.

EXAMPLE

4-4

DRIVING TIPS

82PH0-74E

Driving on Slippery Roads

60G089S

Under wet road conditions you shoulddrive at a lower speed than on dry roadsdue to possible slippage of tires duringbraking. When driving on icy, snow-cov-ered, or muddy roads, reduce your speedand avoid sudden acceleration, abruptbraking, or sharp steering movements.

Tire ChainsTire chains should only be used if they areneeded to increase traction or are requiredby law. Make sure that the chains you useare the correct size for your vehicle’s tires.Also make sure that there is enough clear-ance between the fenders and the chainsas installed on the tires.Install the chains on the front tires tightly,according to the chain manufacturer’sinstructions. Retighten the chains afterdriving about 1.0 km if necessary. Driveslowly with the chains installed.

If Your Vehicle Gets StuckIf your vehicle gets stuck in snow, mud, orsand, follow the directions below:1) Shift the transaxle back and forth

between first gear and reverse. This willcreate a rocking motion which may giveyou enough momentum to free thevehicle. Press gently on the acceleratorto keep wheel spinning to a minimumwheel rpm. Remove your foot from theaccelerator while shifting. Do not race the engine. Excessivewheel spin will cause the tires to digdeeper, making it more difficult to freethe vehicle.

2) If your vehicle remains stuck after a fewminutes of rocking, we recommend youto consult your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop or a roadside assis-tance service. If a towing service is notavailable in an emergency, your vehiclemay be temporarily towed by a towingcable or chain secured to the towinghook either on the front of the vehicle oron the rear of the vehicle. Refer to“Frame Hooks” in the “OTHER CON-TROLS AND EQUIPMENT” section.

NOTICEWhen descending down a hill,NEVER turn the ignition key to the“LOCK” position or press the engineswitch to change the ignition mode toLOCK (OFF). Emission control sys-tem damage may result.

EXAMPLENOTICE

• If you hear the chains hittingagainst the vehicle body while driv-ing, stop and tighten them.

• If your vehicle is equipped with fullwheel caps, remove the wheel capsbefore installing the chains or thewheel caps can be damaged by thechain bands.

4-5

DRIVING TIPS

82PH0-74E

Driving on Wet Roads

82PHM04001

WARNINGDo not allow anyone to stand nearthe vehicle when you are rocking it,and do not spin the wheels fasterthan an indicated 40 km/h on thespeedometer. Personal injury and/orvehicle damage may result from spin-ning the wheels too fast.

NOTICEDo not continue rocking the vehiclefor more than a few minutes. Pro-longed rocking can cause engineoverheating or transaxle damage.

NOTICE• When driving on wet roads, avoid

driving through large amount ofstanding water on the road. Largeamount of water entering theengine compartment may causedamage to the engine and or elec-trical components.

• If stuck in deep water, do not startthe engine.

• Water is incompressible substance,water inside engine is harmful tothe engine.

WARNINGIn addition to following the drivingtips in this section, it is important toobserve the following precautions.• Make sure your tires are in good

condition and always maintain thespecified tire pressure. Refer to“Tires” in the “INSPECTION ANDMAINTENANCE” section fordetails.

• Do not use tires other than thosespecified by MARUTI SUZUKI.Never use different sizes or typesof tires on the front and rearwheels. For information regardingthe specified tires, refer to the TireInformation Label located on thedriver’s door lock pillar.

• Never use oversized tires or spe-cial shock absorbers and springsto raise (jack up) your vehicle. Thiswill change the handling character-istics. Oversized tires may also rubagainst the fender over bumps,causing vehicle damage or tire fail-ure.

(Continued)

WARNING(Continued)• After driving through water, test the

brakes while driving at a slowspeed to see if they have main-tained their normal effectiveness. Ifthe brakes are less effective thannormal, dry them by repeatedlyapplying the brakes while drivingslowly until the brakes haveregained their normal effective-ness.

EXAMPLE

4-6

DRIVING TIPS

82PH0-74E

Do’s and Dont’s for Safe DrivingExercise care in handling your vehicle. Beconscious of not only your own safety butalso the safety of others on the road, andthus enjoy the best and most comfortabledriving experience.Following are basic rules for safe driving.Read them carefully for good understand-ing of the content so that you can enjoysafe and pleasant driving in your vehicle.

Starting1) Adjust the driver’s seat for the proper

driving posture.2) Adjust the rear view mirror so as to

obtain the best possible rear view.

72F-08-001

3) Before moving, look around your vehi-cle to confirm safety.

4) Don’t accelerate suddenly, since it isdangerous and wastes fuel.

General Driving1) Be sure to stop before a stop light or

stop sign. When moving into an inter-section without any traffic lights orsigns, drive slowly to confirm safety.

2) Always follow other vehicles at a safedistance in order to prevent a rear-endcollision, in case the vehicle aheadmakes a sudden stop.

72F-08-008

3) Turn ON the turn signal at least 30meters before making a turn or chang-ing the lane so as not to be hit.

4) Before entering a corner, decelerate toa safe speed. Don’t apply brakes duringcornering, or skidding may occur.

5) When overtaking other vehicles, watchout for oncoming vehicles and carefullyensure safety.

6) Don’t attempt zigzag driving as it willhinder your control over the vehicle andmay cause an accident.

7) Avoid reckless high speed driving andtry to drive at a safe speed suitable forthe road conditions while maintaining aconstant speed.

8) The higher the speed, the narrower thedriver’s visual range becomes. In sucha state, it is difficult to anticipate anyhazard and the driver feels fatigued.

72F-08-015

9) Do not attempt sharp handling duringhigh speed driving. You may lose yourcontrol over your vehicle.

10)When overtaking or changing laneswhile driving at a high speed, keepample vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

4-7

DRIVING TIPS

82PH0-74E

Braking

72F-08-011

1) Use the parking brake when parkingyour vehicle and shift the gear shiftlever into the first gear or reverse gearposition for the sake of safety.

2) Don’t use hand-braking unless unavoid-able. It causes the vehicle to skid and acollision may occur. It is especially dan-gerous when the tyres are worn out asthey skid more.

72F-08-012

Use foot brake in three stages1. Warn the vehicle behind you2. Gradually apply the brake.3. Bring the vehicle to a halt.

3) When driving downhill, try not to applythe brake but use the engine brakeeffectively. Overuse of the foot-brakemay result in reduction of brake effec-tiveness.

Long Distance Driving1) Be sure to perform safety checks before

starting a trip.2) Take rest at regular intervals to prevent

accidents which may occur due to feel-ing sleepy or tired.

Night Time Driving

72F-08-020

1) Drive at lower speeds during the nightthan in the daytime, as the visual rangeis restricted at night.

2) Avoid overtaking other vehicles at night.Darkness bothers your sense of speedand hinders your judgment of vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

72F-08-021

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

4-8

DRIVING TIPS

82PH0-74E

3) Don’t use headlights on high beamunless its use is inevitable. It may causevisual impairment to the driver of theoncoming vehicle or the vehicle aheadof you, which may cause an accident.

4) Always keep the window glasses clean.Don’t operate the windshield wiperwhen the windshield glass is dry elsethe wiper blade and glass may get dam-aged.

Margin for SafetyIt is important to allow yourself a margin forsafety during driving so that you can copewith erroneous or unexpected driving ofother drivers. For that, observe the follow-ing.• Drive at a safe speed.• Maintain a sufficient distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.• Don’t force yourself to overtake other

vehicles.• Don’t accelerate suddenly, steer sharply

or stop suddenly.• Keep ample gaps between driving

schedules.• Observe traffic rules and regulations.

ConclusionA perfect driver does not exist. Theendeavour of every motorist should be tostrive for perfection. Safety consciousnessnot only ensures your safety and the safetyof other road users, it also helps reducethe wear and tear on your vehicle, length-ens its life, gives better fuel efficiency andensures a comfortable driving experience.Follow the do’s and dont’s listed, anddriving will never be the same again.

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

5

82PH0-74E

68PM5002

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENTFuel Filler Cap ..................................................................... 5-1Engine Hood ........................................................................ 5-2Sun Visor ............................................................................. 5-4Interior Light ........................................................................ 5-5Accessory Socket ............................................................... 5-8AUX/USB Socket (if equipped)............................................ 5-8Assist Grips (if equipped) .................................................. 5-9Glove Box ............................................................................ 5-9Overhead Console (if equipped) ........................................ 5-10Instrument Panel Upper Box (Cool Box) ........................... 5-11Cup Holder and Storage Area ............................................ 5-12Footrest ................................................................................ 5-15Floor Mats (if equipped) ..................................................... 5-15Underseat Tray (if equipped) .............................................. 5-16Shopping hook (if equipped) .............................................. 5-16Luggage Compartment Cover (if equipped) ..................... 5-17Luggage Compartment Board ........................................... 5-18Frame Hooks ....................................................................... 5-18Air Conditioning System .................................................... 5-20Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System ................. 5-22Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System (Climate Control) ................................................................. 5-26Radio Antenna ..................................................................... 5-31Audio System (if equipped) ................................................ 5-32

5-1


82PH0-74E

Fuel Filler Cap

76MH0A064

74LHT0511

The fuel filler cap is located on the left rearside of the vehicle. The fuel filler door canbe unlocked by pulling up the opener leverlocated on the outboard side of the driver’sseat and locked by simply closing the door.

68KN048

To remove the fuel filler cap:1) Open the fuel filler door.2) Remove the cap by turning it counter-

clockwise.

82PM05003

NOTE:The cap holder (1) hold the fuel filler cap(2) by hooking the cap to the groove (3)when refueling.

To reinstall the fuel filler cap:1) Turn the cap clockwise until you hear

several clicks.2) Close the fuel filler door.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONRemove the fuel filler cap slowly. Thefuel may be under pressure and mayspray out, causing injury.

Open Close

EXAMPLE

WARNINGFuel is extremely flammable. Do notsmoke when refueling, and makesure there are no open flames orsparks in the area.

(1)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1)

EXAMPLE

5-2


82PH0-74E

Engine Hood

82PH05038

To open the engine hood:1) Pull the hood release handle located on

the outboard side of the driver’s side.This will disengage the engine hoodlock halfway.

82PH05039

2) Push the under-hood release leversideways with your finger, as shown inthe illustration. While pushing the lever,lift up the engine hood.

WARNINGIf you need to replace the fuel cap,use a MARUTI genuine cap. Use of animproper cap can result in a malfunc-tion of the fuel system or emissioncontrol system. It may also result infuel leakage in the event of an acci-dent.

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONThe release lever can be hot enoughto burn your finger right after driving.Touch the lever after it becomes coolenough.

NOTICEMake sure that the wiper arms are notraised before you lift up the enginehood to avoid damaging the wiperarms and the engine hood.

5-3


82PH0-74E

82PH05041

3) While holding the hood, pull the proprod out from the holding clip, then insertthe end of the rod into the designatedhole in the hood.

To close the engine hood:1) Lift the hood up slightly and remove the

prop rod from the hole. Put the prop rodback to the holding clip.

82PH05040

2) Lower the hood to about 20 cm abovethe hood latch, then let it drop down. Make sure the hood is securely latchedafter closing.

CAUTION• The prop rod can be hot enough to

burn your finger right after driving.Touch the rod after it becomes coolenough.

• Insert the end of the rod into thehole securely. If the rod drops off,your body may be caught in thehood.

• The rod may drop off when thehood is hit by a wind. Be careful onwindy days.

WARNINGMake sure the hood is fully closedand latched before driving. If it is not,it can fly up unexpectedly duringdriving, obstructing your view andresulting in an accident.

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONTo avoid injury, be sure no part of theoccupant’s body such as hands orhead is in the path of the hood whenclosing it.

NOTICEPressing the hood from above maydamage the hood.

5-4


82PH0-74E

Sun Visor

77PH004

The sun visors can be pulled down to blockglare coming through the windshield, orthey can be unhooked and turned to theside to block glare coming through the sidewindow.

Card holder (if equipped)Type A

67LH064

Type B

82PH012

(1) Card holder(2) Mirror cover

You can put a card in the card holder (1) onthe back of the sun visor.

NOTICEWhen unhooking and hooking a sunvisor, be sure to handle it by the hardplastic parts or the sun visor can bedamaged.

EXAMPLE

(1)

EXAMPLE

(2)

(1)

EXAMPLE

NOTICEWhen you park your vehicle outdoorsin direct sunlight or in hot weather,do not leave plastic cards in theholder. The heat may distort them.

5-5


82PH0-74E

Vanity mirror (if equipped)

80JS119

(3) Vanity mirror

To use the vanity mirror (3) on the back ofthe sun visor, pull up the mirror cover (1).

Interior Light

82PH05002

(1) Glove box light (if equipped)(2) Footwell lights (if equipped)

82PH05003

(3) Vanity mirror light (if equipped)(4) Front (if equipped)(5) Center(6) Luggage compartment (if equipped)

WARNING• Do not use the mirror while driving

your vehicle or could lose controlof the vehicle.

• When using the vanity mirror, donot move too close to a front airbag location or lean against it. Ifthe front air bag is accidentallyinflated, it could hit you hard.

(3)

EXAMPLEEXAMPLE

SRS AIRBAG

AUTO

1 3 5

2 4 R

AC

OFF

TEMP

MODE

100 1203 4

5

(2)

(1)

(2)

(3)(4)

(5)

(6)

EXAMPLE

5-6


82PH0-74E

Glove Box Light (if equipped) (1)Refer to “Glove Box” in this section.

Footwell Lights (if equipped) (2)The footwell lights are provided in the legspace in front of each front seat. The lightcomes on when any door (including thetailgate) is opened. After closing all doors,the light will remain on for about 15 sec-onds and then fade out. If you insert thekey, or press the engine switch to changethe ignition mode to ACC or ON during thistime, the light will start to fade out immedi-ately. After removing the key from the igni-tion switch, the light will turn on for about15 seconds and then fade out.NOTE:You can change the footwell lights opera-tion via the information display. Refer to“Information Display” in the “BEFOREDRIVING” section.

Vanity Mirror Light (if equipped) (3)

82PH014

Front (if equipped) (4)

64MS119

Center (5)

61MM0A107

These light switches have three or fourpositions which function as describedbelow:

ON (a)• The light comes on and stays on regard-

less of whether the door is open orclosed.

• To save the battery, the light will be auto-matically turned off when a period of 15minutes has elapsed after the light is on.

DOOR (b)• The light comes on when the door is

opened. After closing all doors, the lightwill remain on for about 15 seconds andthen fade out. If you insert the key, orpress the engine switch to change theignition mode to ACC or ON during thistime, the light will start to fade out imme-

(c) (a)

OPEN

PUSHTILT

CLOSE

(d) (c) (b) (a) (d)

EXAMPLE

(a)(b)(c)EXAMPLE

5-7


82PH0-74E

diately. After removing the key from theignition switch, the light will turn on forabout 15 seconds and then fade out.

• Regardless of whether the door is openor closed, the light comes on 15 secondsand then fade out when the ignitionmode is changed to LOCK (OFF) or theignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”position.

OFF (c)The light remains off even when the door isopened.

SPOT LIGHT (d)When the light switch is in the DOOR orOFF position, push the switch to turn onthe light and push it again to turn off thelight.

Luggage Compartment (if equipped) (6)

61MM0B023

When you open the tailgate with the lug-gage compartment light switch in the ONposition (1), the light comes on andremains on as long as you keep the tail-gate open.When the luggage compartment lightswitch is in the OFF position (2), the lightremains off regardless of whether the tail-gate is open or close.

61MM0A108

NOTE:The number of doors involved in the light-ing operation of the interior light dependson the vehicle specification. If there is aswitch (rubber projection) at the dooropening as shown, the door is involved inthe lighting operation. The tailgate is alsoinvolved in this operation even without therubber projection.

NOTICEDo not leave the tailgate open withthe luggage compartment lightswitch in the ON position for a longtime, or the battery will discharge.

(1)(2)

EXAMPLE

5-8


82PH0-74E

Accessory SocketCenter console

82PH05004

Luggage compartment (if equipped)

82PH05005

The accessory socket will work when theignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-tion, or the ignition mode is ACC or ON.Each socket can be used to provide 12volt/120 watt/10 ampere power for electri-cal accessories when used alone. Makesure that the cap remains on the socketwhen the socket is not in use.

AUX/USB Socket (if equipped)

82PH05006

Connect your portable digital music player,etc. to this socket to enjoy music throughthe vehicle’s audio system using it as asource. Refer to “Audio System” in thissection.

1

USCAUX

3 5

2 4 R

AUTO

AC

OFF

TEMP

MODE

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

NOTICE• To prevent the fuse from being

blown, when using sockets at thesame time, do not exceed the totalcombined power capacity of 12volt/120 watt/10 ampere.

• Use of inappropriate electricalaccessories can cause damage toyour vehicle’s electrical system.Make sure that any electricalaccessories you use are designedto plug into this type of socket.

NOTICEAlways close the lid when not in use,since entry of foreign material, dust,water, conductive liquids may dam-age the audio system or USB device.

1

USCAUX

3 5

2 4 R

AUTO

AC

OFF

TEMP

MODE

EXAMPLE

5-9


82PH0-74E

Assist Grips (if equipped)

76MH0A072

Assist grips are provided for convenience.

Coat Hooks (if equipped)

61MM0B025

You can hang clothing on the coat hooks.These hooks are not designed for large orheavy items.

Glove Box

82PH05007

To open the glove box, pull the latch lever.To close it, push the lid until it latchessecurely.NOTICE

To avoid damaging the assist gripand the molded headlining, do nothang down the assist grip.

WARNINGNever drive with the glove box lidopen. It could cause injury if an acci-dent occurs.

EXAMPLE

5-10


82PH0-74E

82PH05008

The glove box light (if equipped) stays onwhile the lid is open.

Overhead Console (if equipped)

82PH05055

Use this stowage to keep small articles.You can open the lid (1) by pressing thedepressed portion on it.

EXAMPLE

(1)

EXAMPLE

WARNING• Do not drive with the overhead con-

sole lid open, or the articles stowedinside could fall down during brak-ing, acceleration or in the event ofa collision. Always close the lidafter putting something into or tak-ing something out of the console.

• If you park your vehicle outdoors indirect sunlight or in hot weather,the overhead console can get veryhot since it is close to the roof. So,when parking in such conditions:– Do not leave eyeglasses or other

plastic items in the overheadconsole. The heat may distortplastic lenses or frames.

– Do not place flammable items,such as a lighter, in the overheadconsole. The heat may cause afire.

NOTICE• Do not apply undue force to the lid

when closing it. Doing so couldbreak the lid and articles inside.

• Place glasses in a case when stow-ing them in the overhead console,or the lenses may be damaged.

5-11


82PH0-74E

Instrument Panel Upper Box (if equipped)

82PH05009

To open the instrument panel upper box,push the button (1) at the center with twofingers.Keep the lid closed except when you put orremove an object.

Cool Box (if equipped)

82PH05010

When the air conditioning system is oper-ated with the ventilation position, youcan keep items such as drinks cool in thecool box. Turn the shut dial (2) to open orclose the air outlet.• To cool the box, turn the dial counter-

clockwise when the air conditioning sys-tem is on.

• To stop cooling, turn the dial clockwise.

Keep the shut dial (2) in closed position ifthe cool feature is not in use.

NOTE:The temperature of the air that comes intothe box is almost the same as the ventila-tion air flow temperature. The temperaturein the box cannot be cooler than the tem-perature of the air that comes into the box.

WARNINGNever drive with the instrument panelupper box lid open. It could causepersonal injury in an accident.

(1)EXAMPLE

(2) CLOSE

OPEN

NOTICE• The cooling effectiveness of the

cool box will be reduced if itemsplaced in the cool box block the airoutlet.

• When cooling function is beingused, condensed moisture candamage any papers, documents,electronic equipment etc., kept inthe cool box.

• Do not leave a carbonated drinkcan if you park your vehicle out-doors in direct sunlight or in hotweather, where inside of the coolbox can get very hot. The carbon-ated drink can may explode.

• Do not place an opened-can whichcontains drink. The cool box maybe damaged if it is spilled out.

• Do not put perishable food items inthe cool box as it may not maintainnecessary consistent temperatureto keep the food fresh.

• Do not put items with strong odourin the cool box. The odour mayspread inside the passenger cabin.

5-12


82PH0-74E

Cup Holder and Storage Area

82PH05011

(1) Instrument panel pocket (2) Front cup holders

(3) Front armrest with console box (if equipped) (4) Front door pocket

(5) Rear Console Pocket (if equipped) (6) Front seat back pocket

(7) Rear door pocket (8) Rear armrest with cup holder (if equipped)

(9) Luggage compartment pocket (10) Driver side Pocket

(11) Underseat tray (if equipped)

(7)

(6)

(6) (9)

(9)

(4)(1)

(11)(2)

(4)(10) (3)

(7)

(5) (8)

EXAMPLE

Instrument Panel Pocket (1) / Driver Side Pocket (10)

WARNINGDo not place any objects which mayfall out from the pocket when thevehicle is moving.Failure to take the precaution mayresult in an object interfering with thepedals and causing a loss of vehiclecontrol or an accident.

5-13


82PH0-74E

Front Cup Holders (2)

82PH05052

Front Armrest with Console Box (if equipped) (3)

82PH05042

The armrest can be slide forward.Console boxUse this stowage for keeping small items.Open the compartment by raising the toplid while keeping the lever (1) up.

82PH05043

Always close the lid after you put somethinginto or take something out of the box.

WARNINGFailure to take the precautions listedbelow could cause personal injury orvehicle damage.• Be careful when you are using the

cup holders to hold a cup contain-ing hot liquid. Spilling out hot liq-uid can cause burn injury.

• Do not use the cup holders to holdsharp-edged, hard, or breakableobjects. Objects in the cup holdersmay be thrown about during a sud-den stop or impact, and couldcause personal injury.

• Be careful not to spill liquid orinsert any foreign materials into themoving part of the gearshift lever,or any electrical components. Liq-uid or foreign materials may dam-age these parts.

EXAMPLENOTICE

To avoid damage to the armrest, donot lean on it or allow a child to sit onit.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

(1)

(1)

5-14


82PH0-74E

Front Door Pocket (4) /Rear Door Pocket (7)This pocket is provided for holding lightand small items.

82PH05056

Bottle holderYou should hold a bottle with a cap in theholder.

Rear Console Pocket (5)

82PH05051

Open the top to use the cup holder.

Front Seat Back Pocket (6)

82PH05045

This pocket is provided for holding lightand soft things such as gloves, newspa-pers or magazines.

AUTO

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONDo not put hard or breakable objectsin the pocket. If an accident occurs,objects such as bottles, cans, etc.can injure the occupants in the rearseat.

EXAMPLE

5-15


82PH0-74E

Rear Armrest with Cup Holders (if equipped) (8)

82PH05046

(1) Cup holdersThe rear armrest is stowed in the center ofthe seatback. Tilt it down forward to use.

Luggage Compartment Pocket (9)

82PH05047

Underseat Tray (if equipped) (11)

82PH05033

The tray is located under the front passen-gers seat. Pull the handle forward to drawout the tray. Be sure to push back in thetray before driving.

Footrest

58MST0509

Use the footrest (1) as a support for yourleft foot.

WARNING• If the seat belt is obstructed by any

part of the armrest when fastened,it cannot provide the intended pro-tection. After fastening the seatbelt, always check that the armrestis not interfering with the belt.

• In an accident or sudden stop, therear seat armrest could fall for-ward. If there is a child in a rear-fac-ing child restraint in the rear centerseating position, the falling armrestcould injure the child. Do not installa rear-facing child restraint in therear center seating position.

(1)

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

NOTICETo avoid breaking of underseat traydo not hold the items weighing morethan 1 kg.

CAUTIONEnsure proper locking of underseattray before driving. Incorrect lockingwill lead to rattling noise while driv-ing.

(1)

EXAMPLE

5-16


82PH0-74E

Floor Mats (if equipped)

64MS085

To prevent the driver’s side floor mat fromsliding forward and possibly interfering withthe operation of the pedals, MARUTI genu-ine floor mats are recommended.Whenever you put the driver’s side floormat back in the vehicle after it has beenremoved, be sure to hook the floor matgrommet(s) to the fastener(s) and positionthe floor mat properly in the footwell.When you replace the floor mats in yourvehicle with a different type such as all-weather floor mats, we highly recommendusing MARUTI genuine floor mats forproper fitting.

Shopping Hook (if equipped)Luggage Compartment (if equipped)

64MS086

You can hang the shopping bag or othersuitable objects on the hook.This hook is not designed for large orheavy items.

EXAMPLEWARNING

Failure to take the following precau-tions may result in the driver’s sidefloor mat interfering with the pedalsand causing a loss of vehicle controlor an accident.• Make sure that the floor mat grom-

met(s) is(are) hooked to the fas-tener(s).

• Never place additional floor matson top of the existing floor mat.

NOTICETo avoid breaking the hook, do nothang items heavier than followingweight.Shopping hook: 1 kg

EXAMPLE

5-17


82PH0-74E

Behind Driver Seat (if equipped)You can hang the shopping bag or othersuitable objects on the hook. This hook isnot designed for large or heavy items.

82PH05049

Luggage Compartment Cover (if equipped)

82PH05048

Luggage or other cargo placed in the lug-gage compartment is hidden from view bya luggage compartment cover.

NOTICETo avoid breaking the hook, do nothang items heavier than 3 kg.

NOTICEMake sure the weight is not hung onthe front seat back hook during thereclining of driver seat.

EXAMPLE

WARNINGDo not carry items on top of the lug-gage compartment cover, even if theyare small and light. Objects on top ofthe cover could be thrown about inan accident, causing injury, or couldobstruct the driver’s rear view.

EXAMPLE

NOTICETo avoid damaging the luggage com-partment cover:• Do not push down on it or lean on

it.• Handle it carefully when installing

or removing.

5-18


82PH0-74E

Luggage Compartment Board

64MS088

Your vehicle is equipped with the luggagecompartment board in the luggage com-partment.

61MM0B036

If the vehicle is equipped with the luggagecompartment cover, then the luggage com-partment board can be held open asshown in the illustration.

Frame HooksFront

82PH05050

The frame hooks (1) is provided on thefront of the vehicle for use in emergencysituations and train/trailer shipping pur-poses only. The hooks (2) are provided forsea shipping purpose only.To tow your vehicle on the road or high-way, follow the instruction of “Towing” in“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section.

WARNINGObjects that extend higher than theluggage compartment cover (ifequipped) can obstruct the driver’srear view, which can cause an acci-dent. These objects can also becomedamaged or can damage the tailgate.Do not carry items that extend higherthan the luggage compartment cover.

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONIf you are not careful when handlingthe luggage board, you could beinjured.Handle the luggage board carefullywhen removing or installing it.

NOTICEDo not apply undue force to theboard which is held open, and do nothold open the board while driving.Doing so could break the board orthe interior.

EXAMPLE

WARNINGDo not use the frame hooks to towanother vehicle or to have your vehi-cle towed on the road or highway.The hook (1) is designed for use inemergency situations only, such as ifyour vehicle or another vehicle getsstuck in deep mud or snow.

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

5-19


82PH0-74E

Rear

82PH05013

The frame hook (2) is provided on the rearof the vehicle for use in emergency situa-tions and train/sea shipping purposes only.To tow your vehicle on the road or high-way, follow the instruction of “Towing” in“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section.

NOTICEWhen you use the frame hook (1),avoid the driving that gives signifi-cant physical shock on hook. Suchoperation can damage the hook, orthe vehicle body.Do not accelerate suddenly.

(2) EXAMPLE

WARNINGDo not use the frame hooks to towanother vehicle or to have your vehi-cle towed on the road or highway.The hook (2) is designed for use inemergency situations only, such as ifyour vehicle or another vehicle getsstuck in deep mud or snow.

NOTICEWhen you use the frame hook (2),avoid the driving that gives signifi-cant physical shock on hook. Suchoperation can damage the hook, thevehicle body or the drive system. • Do not accelerate suddenly.• Do not tow the vehicle heavier than

your vehicle.

5-20


82PH0-74E

Air Conditioning SystemThere are two types of heating and air con-ditioning systems as follows:• Manual Heating and Air Conditioning

System• Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning

System (Climate Control) (if equipped)

Air Outlet

82PH05014

1. Windshield defroster outlet2. Side defroster outlet3. Side outlet4. Center outlet5. Floor outlet

SRS AIRBAG

AUTO

1 3 5

2 4 R

AC

OFF

TEMP

MODE

100 1203 4

5

AIRBAG

(1)

(2) (2)

(5)

(4) (4)

(5)

(3) (3)

EXAMPLE

5-21


82PH0-74E

Side outlet

82PH049

Move the knob (1) vertically or horizontally,to adjust the direction of airflow as desired.

(1)

EXAMPLECenter outlet

82PH050

Move the knob (1) vertically or horizontally to adjust the direction of airflow as desired.

(1) (1)EXAMPLE

5-22


82PH0-74E

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning SystemDescription of Controls

82PH051

Temperature selector (1)This is used to select the temperature byturning the selector.

Blower speed selector (2)This is used to turn on the blower and toselect blower speed by turning the selec-tor.

Air flow selector (3)

61MM0A019

This is used to select one of the functionsdescribed below.Ventilation (a)

82PH05015

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe center and side air outlets.

Bi-level (b)

82PH05016

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor outlets and cooler air comes outof the center and side outlets. When thetemperature selector (1) is in the fullyCOLD position or fully HOT position, how-ever, the air from the floor outlets and theair from the center and side outlets will bethe same temperature.Heat (c)

82PH05017

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor outlets and the side outlets, alsocomes out of the windshield defroster out-lets and also comes slightly out of the sidedefroster outlets.

(1) (4) (5) (3)

(2)

(a)

(b)

(e)

(d)

(c)

5-23


82PH0-74E

Heat & defrost (d)

82PH05018

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor outlets, the windshield defrosteroutlets, the side defroster outlets and theside outlets.Defrost (e)

82PH05019

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe windshield defroster outlets, the sidedefroster outlets and the side outlets.

Air intake selector (4)

82PH015

This selector is used to select the followingmodes.

Fresh Air (f)When this mode is selected, the indicatorlight will go off and outside air is used.Recirculated Air (g)When this mode is selected, the indicatorlight will come on, outside air is shut outand inside air is recirculated. This mode issuitable when driving through dusty or pol-luted air such as in a tunnel, or whenattempting to quickly cool down the inte-rior.

The fresh air position (f) and recirculatedair position (g) are switched alternatelyeach time the air intake selector is pushed.

NOTE:If you select the recirculated air position (g)for an extended period of time, the air inthe vehicle can become contaminated.Therefore, you should occasionally selectthe fresh air position (f).

Air conditioning switch (5)To turn on the air conditioning system, setthe blower speed selector to the desiredblower speed position and push in the airconditioning switch (5). With the air condi-tioning switch operation, a indicator lightwill come on when the air conditioning sys-tem is on. To turn off the air conditioningsystem, push the air conditioning switchagain.During operation of the air conditioner, youmay notice slight changes in enginespeed. These changes are normal, thesystem is designed so that the compressorturns on or off to maintain the desired tem-perature. Less operation of the compressor resultsin better fuel economy.

(f) (g)

5-24


82PH0-74E

System Operating InstructionsNatural ventilationSelect the ventilation position (a) and freshair position (f), the temperature selector tothe desired temperature position, and turnoff the blower. Fresh air will flow throughthe vehicle during driving.Forced ventilationThe control settings are the same as fornatural ventilation except turning theblower speed selector to turn on theblower.Normal heating (using outside air)Select the heat position (c) and fresh airposition (f), the temperature selector to thedesired temperature position and theblower speed selector to the desiredblower speed position. Setting the blowerspeed selector to a higher blower speedposition increases heating efficiency.Quick heating (using recirculated air)The control settings are the same as fornormal heating except selecting the recir-culated air position (g). If you use this heat-ing method for an extended period of time,the air in the vehicle can become contami-nated and the windows can become misty.Therefore, use this method only for quickheating and change to the normal heatingmethod as soon as possible.

Head cooled/Feet warmed heatingSelect the bi-level position (b) and fresh airposition (f), the temperature selector to thedesired temperature position, and theblower speed selector to the desiredblower speed position. Unless the tem-perature selector is in the fully COLD posi-tion or fully HOT position, the air thatcomes out of the center and side outletswill be cooler than the air that comes out ofthe floor outlets.Normal coolingSet the air flow selector to the ventilationposition (a), the temperature selector to thedesired temperature position and theblower speed selector to the desired blowerspeed position, and push in the air condi-tioning switch (5) to turn on the air condi-tioning system. Setting the blower speedselector to a higher blower speed positionincreases cooling efficiency.You can switch the air intake selector toeither the fresh air position (f) or recircu-lated air position (g) as you desire. Choos-ing the recirculated air position (g)increases cooling efficiency.Quick cooling (using recirculated air)The control settings are the same as fornormal cooling except selecting the recir-culated air position (g) and the highestblower speed.

NOTE:• If you select the recirculated air position

(g) for an extended period of time, the airin the vehicle can become contaminated.Therefore, you should occasionallyselect the fresh air position (f).

• If your vehicle has been left in the sunwith the windows closed, it will coolfaster if you open the windows brieflywhile you operate the air conditioner withthe air intake selector at the fresh airposition (f) and the blower at high speed.

DehumidifyingSet the air flow selector to a desired airflow selector position, the temperatureselector to the desired temperature posi-tion and the blower speed selector to thedesired blower speed position. Also selectthe fresh air position (f) and push in the airconditioning switch (5) to turn on the airconditioning system.

NOTE:Because the air conditioner dehumidifiesthe air, turning it on will help keep the win-dows clear, even when blowing heated airusing the defrost position (e) or heat &defrost position (d).

5-25


82PH0-74E

64MS091

NOTE:If you need maximum defrosting:• select the defrost position (e) and fresh

air position (f),• set the blower speed selector to HIGH,• adjust the temperature selector to the

HOT end,• push in the air conditioning switch (5) to

turn on the air conditioning system, and• adjust the side outlets so the air blows

on the side windows.

MaintenanceIf you do not use the air conditioner for along period, such as during winter, it maynot give the best performance when youstart using it again. To help maintain opti-mum performance and durability of your airconditioner, it needs to be run periodically.Operate the air conditioner at least once amonth for one minute with the engineidling. This circulates the refrigerant and oiland helps protect the internal components.If your air conditioner is equipped with airfilters, clean or replace them as specifiedin the “Maintenance Schedule” in the“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” sec-tion.

NOTE:Your vehicle uses the air conditioningrefrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called“R-134a”. R-134a replaced R-12 around1993 for automotive applications. Otherrefrigerants are available, including recy-cled R-12, but only R-134a should be usedin your vehicle.

EXAMPLE

NOTICEUsing the wrong refrigerant maydamage your air conditioning sys-tem. Use R-134a only. Do not mix orreplace the R-134a with other refrig-erants.

5-26


82PH0-74E

Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System (Climate Control) (if equipped)Description of Controls

82PM050001

(1) Temperature selector(2) Blower speed selector(3) Air intake selector(4) “MODE” switch(5) Defrost switch

(6) Air conditioning switch(7) “OFF” switch(8) “AUTO” switch(9) Display

(3)

(4)

(5)(6)

(7) (8)(1) (2)

(9)

EXAMPLE

Temperature selector (1)

82PH053

Push upper part or lower part of the tem-perature selector (1) to adjust the tempera-ture. The display (9) shows the selectedtemperature.

NOTE:If you push the temperature selector (1)until “HI” or “LO” appears on the display,the climate control system will operate atmaximum heating or cooling. The tempera-ture of the air from the outlets may changesuddenly while “LO” or “HI” is displayed,but this is normal.

NOTE:When you change the units of temperaturein the information display, the automaticheating and air conditioning system tem-perature display units will be changedautomatically. Refer to “Information Dis-play” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” sectionfor details.

(1)

5-27


82PH0-74E

Blower speed selector (2)

82PH054

The blower speed selector (2) is used toturn on the blower and to select blowerspeed.If the “AUTO” switch (8) is pushed, theblower speed will vary automatically as theclimate control system maintains theselected temperature.

Air intake selector (3)

82PH055

Push the air intake selector (3) to changebetween the following modes.If the “AUTO” switch (8) is pushed, the airintake will vary automatically as the climatecontrol system maintains the selected tem-perature.

NOTE:When you select the recirculated air mode,the automatic operation system is deacti-vated if you push the “AUTO” switch (8).

RECIRCULATED AIR (a)When this mode is selected, outside air isshut off and inside air is recirculated. Thismode is suitable when driving through anarea with polluted air such as a tunnel, orwhen attempting to quickly cool down thevehicle.FRESH AIR (b)When this mode is selected, outside air isintroduced.The fresh air position (b) and recirculatedair position (a) are selected alternatelyeach time the air intake selector is pushed.

NOTE:If you select the recirculated air position (a)for an extended period of time, the air inthe vehicle can become contaminated.Therefore, you should occasionally selectthe fresh air position (b).

(2)

(b)

(a) (3)

5-28


82PH0-74E

“MODE” switch (4)

82PH056

Push the “MODE” switch (4) to changeamong the following functions. The indica-tion of the selected mode appears on thedisplay.If the “AUTO” switch (8) is pushed, the airflow will vary automatically as the climatecontrol system maintains the selected tem-perature.

Ventilation (c)

61M0100

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe center and side outlets.Bi-level (d)

61M0101

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor, center and side outlets.

Heat (e)

61M0102

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor outlets, also comes out of thewindshield defroster outlets and alsocomes slightly out of the side defroster out-lets and the side outlets.

Heat & defrost (f)

61M0103

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor outlets, the windshield defrosteroutlets, the side defroster outlets and theside outlets.

(4)

(c)

(d)

(e)

( f )

5-29


82PH0-74E

Defrost switch (5)

82PH057

Push the defrost switch (5) to turn on thedefroster.

Defrost

61M0106

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe windshield defroster outlets, the sidedefroster outlets and the side outlets.

NOTE:When you push the defrost switch (5), thefresh air position (b) will be automaticallyselected and the air conditioning switch willautomatically turn on (“A/C” will appear onthe display). In cold weather, air flows outof the defroster outlets but the air condi-tioning does not turn on even though the A/C indicator comes on as well as the defrostindicator.

Air conditioning switch (6)

82PH058

The air conditioning switch (6) is used toturn on and off the air conditioning systemonly when the blower is on. To turn on theair conditioning system, push in the switch;“A/C” will appear on the display and theindicator on the switch will come on. Toturn off the air conditioning system, push inthe switch again; “A/C” and the indicatorwill go off.You can use the air conditioning switch (6)to manually turn the air conditioner on or offaccording to your preference. When youturn the air conditioning switch off, the cli-mate control system cannot lower theinside temperature below outside tempera-ture.

(5) (6)

5-30


82PH0-74E

System Operating InstructionsAutomatic operation

82PH059

You can let the climate control systemwork automatically. To set the system forfully-automatic operation, follow the proce-dure below.1) Start the engine.2) Push the “AUTO” switch (8).3) Set the desired temperature by pushing

the temperature selector (1).The blower speed, air intake and air floware controlled automatically to maintain theset temperature. However, the air flow isnot changed to the defrost position auto-matically.To turn the climate control system off, pushthe “OFF” switch (7).

NOTE:If the “AUTO” on the display blinks, there isa problem in the heating system and/or airconditioning system. You should have thesystem inspected by an authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.

NOTE:• To find the temperature at which you are

most comfortable, start with the 25°C(75°F) setting, for example.

• If you push the temperature selector (1)until “HI” or “LO” appears on the display,the climate control system will operate atmaximum heating or cooling.

• To avoid blowing cold air in cold weatheror hot air in hot weather, the system willdelay turning on the blower until warmedor chilled air is available.

• If your vehicle has been left in the sunwith the windows closed, it will coolfaster if you open the windows briefly.

• Even under automatic operation, youcan set individual selectors to the man-ual mode. The manually selected func-tions are maintained, and the otherfunctions remain under automatic opera-tion.

• If the windshield and/or the front doorwindows are fogged, push the defrostswitch (5) to turn on the defroster, orpush the “MODE” switch (4) to changethe air flow to the heat & defrost position(f) to defog the windows.

• To return the blower speed selector (2),air intake selector (3), and “MODE”switch (4) to automatic operation, pushthe “AUTO” switch (8).

64MS149

Be careful not to cover the interior tem-perature sensor (10) located between thesteering wheel and the climate controlpanel, or the solar sensor (11) located atthe top of the central part of the dash-board. These sensors are used by theautomatic system to regulate temperature.

(8)

(7)

(11)

(10)

EXAMPLE

5-31


82PH0-74E

Manual operationYou can manually control the climate con-trol system. Set the selectors to thedesired positions.

64MS091

NOTE:If you need maximum defrosting:• push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the

defroster (the air conditioning system willcome on and the fresh air position (b)will be selected automatically),

• set the blower speed selector to HIGH,• adjust the temperature selector to the

“HI” indication on the display, and• adjust the side outlets so the air blows

on the side windows.

MaintenanceIf you do not use the air conditioner for along period, such as during winter, it maynot give the best performance when youstart using it again. To help maintain opti-mum performance and durability of your airconditioner, it needs to be run periodically.Operate the air conditioner at least once amonth for one minute with the engineidling. This circulates the refrigerant and oiland helps protect the internal components.If your air conditioner is equipped with airfilters, clean or replace them as specifiedin the “Maintenance Schedule” in the“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” sec-tion.

NOTE:Your vehicle uses the air conditioningrefrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called“R-134a”. R-134a replaced R-12 around1993 for automotive applications. Otherrefrigerants are available, including recy-cled R-12, but only R-134a should be usedin your vehicle.

Radio Antenna

68KN028

The radio antenna on the roof is remov-able. To remove the antenna, turn it coun-terclockwise. To reinstall the antenna, turnit clockwise firmly by hand.

EXAMPLE

NOTICEUsing the wrong refrigerant maydamage your air conditioning sys-tem. Use R-134a only. Do not mix orreplace the R-134a with other refrig-erants.

NOTICETo avoid damage to the radioantenna:• Remove the antenna when using an

automatic car wash.• Remove the antenna when the

antenna hits anything such as alow ceiling in a parking garage orputting a car cover over your vehi-cle.

EXAMPLE

5-32


82PH0-74E

Audio System (if equipped)

AST

SETUP

USB MODE

Type A Type B

AST

SETUP

USB MODE

3 4 5 6213 4 5 621

AM / FM /USB / BT / CD PLAYER

NOTE: For vehicle equipped with SMARTPLAY INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM, refer to the audio manual available with the vehicle.

5-33


82PH0-74E

Safety Information Notes on DiscsPrecautions• When the inside of the vehicle is very

cold and the player is used soon afterswitching on the heater, condensationmay form on the disc or the optical partsof the player and proper playback maynot be possible. If condensation formson the disc, wipe it off with a soft cloth. Ifcondensation forms on the optical partsof the player, do not use the player forabout one hour. This will allow the con-densation to disappear normally.

• Driving on extremely bumpy roads whichcause severe vibrations may causesound to skip.

• This unit uses a precision mechanism.Even in the event that trouble arises,never open the case, disassemble theunit, or lubricate the rotating parts.Please bring the unit to an authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop.

Cautions on Handling

This unit has been designed specifically forplayback of compact discs bearing mark(A) shown above.

No other discs can be played.

To remove the compact disc from its stor-age case, press down on the center of thecase and lift the disc out, holding it care-fully by the edges.

Always handle the compact disc by theedges. Never touch the surface.

To remove fingermarks and dust, use asoft cloth, and wipe in a straight line fromthe center of the compact disc to the cir-cumference.

WARNINGIf you pay extended attention to oper-ating the audio system or viewing theaudio system display while driving,an accident can occur. If you set thesound volume too loud, it could pre-vent you from being aware of roadand traffic conditions.• Keep your eyes on the road and

your mind on the drive. Avoid pay-ing extended attention to operatingthe audio system or viewing theaudio system display.

• Familiarize yourself with the audiosystem controls and operation ofthe audio system before driving.

• Preset your favorite radio stationsbefore driving so that you canquickly tune to them using the pre-sets.

• Set the sound volume to a levelthat will allow you to continue to beaware of road and traffic conditionswhile driving.

(A)

Removing the disc Proper way to holdthe compact disc

5-34


82PH0-74E

New discs may have some roughnessaround the edges. The unit may not workor the sound may skip if such discs areused. Use a ball-point pen (B), etc. toremove the roughness (C) from the edgesof the disc before inserting it into the unit.

Never stick labels on the surface of thecompact disc or write on the surface with apencil or pen.

Do not use any solvents such as commer-cially available cleaners, anti-static spray,or thinner to clean compact discs.

Do not use compact discs that have largescratches, are misshaped, or cracked, etc. Use of such discs will cause damage orprevent the system from operating prop-erly.

Do not expose compact discs to direct sun-light or any heat source.

NOTE:• Do not use commercially available CD

protection sheets or discs equipped withstabilizers, etc.These may get caught in the internalmechanism and damage the disc.

• It may be impossible to play CD-R discswith this unit due to the recording condi-tions.

• CD-RW discs cannot be played with thisunit.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logo areregistered trademarks and are owned bythe Bluetooth SIG, Ink.

Stop using this unit and a Bluetooth®

ready device whenever requested.This unit shares the communication fre-quency with other private or public wirelesscommunication equipment such as a wire-less LAN and other wireless communica-tion radios.You should stop using this unit wheneveryou are notified that your unit disturbsother wireless communication immediately.

(B)(B)(C)

WARNINGThis is a class I laser product. Use ofcontrols or adjustments or perfor-mance of procedures other thanthose specified herein may result inhazardous radiation exposure.Do not open covers and do notattempt to repair this unit by yourself.Refer servicing to qualified person-nel.

5-35


82PH0-74E

Basic Operations

82PH05023

(1) VOL PUSH POWER, knob(2) TUNE FOLDER, knob

AST

SETUP

USB MODE

(1)(2)3 4 5 621

Turning power on/offLong Press the VOL PUSH POWER,knob (1).The unit starts in the function mode it wasin when the power was turned off last.

Adjusting the volumeTurn the VOL PUSH POWER, knob (1).Turning it clockwise increases the volume;turning it counterclockwise decreases thevolume.

NOTE:While driving, adjust the volume to anextent that sound and/or noise comingfrom outside the vehicle can be heard.

MutePress the VOL PUSH POWER, knob (1)to mute the sound. To cancel the mute,press the VOL PUSH POWER, knob (1)again.

5-36


82PH0-74E

Bluetooth® Mic *(3)Type A audio - Internal Mic

82PH05022

Type B audio - External Mic

82PH05034

Adjusting bass /mid /treble /balance /fader1) Press the TUNE FOLDER, knob (2).

Each time the knob is pressed, soundadjustment will change as follows:

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (2) toadjust the sound.

Adjusting the AVC (Auto volume con-trol)The Auto Volume Control (AVC) functionautomatically adjusts (increases/decreases) the sound volume in accor-dance with vehicle speed. The AVC controlis provided with three selectable levels(LEVEL OFF, 1, 2, 3). The range of volumeadjustment increases together with theLEVEL number.1) Press the TUNE FOLDER, knob (2)

several times until the AVC adjustmentmode is selected.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (2) toselect the desired AVC adjustmentlevel. (Initial setting: LEVEL 2)

Preset-EQPreset-EQ calls up various sound types inaccordance with the listening music type.1) Press the TUNE FOLDER, knob (2)

several times until “EQ” appears.2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (2).

Each time the knob is turned, presetEQ mode will change as follows:

(3)

(3)

Preset-EQ (EQ OFF)

Bass adjustment (BASS 0)

Mid adjustment (Mid 0)

Treble adjustment (TREBLE 0)

Balance adjustment (BALANCE 0)

Fader adjustment (FADER 0)

AVC adjustment (AVC LEVEL 2)

OFF (FLAT)

ROCK

CLASSIC

POP

JAZZ

HIP-HOP

5-37


82PH0-74E

Listening to the Radio

82PH05024

(4)

(6)

(5)

(2)(1)

(3)

AST

SETUP

USB MODE

3 4 5 621

Display

68PH05036

(1) FM/AM button(2) Up button(3) Down button(4) TUNE FOLDER, knob(5) Preset buttons ([1] to [6])(6) / AST button

(A) Band(B) Frequency

(A)

(B)

5-38


82PH0-74E

Selecting the FM/AM bandPress the FM/AM button (1).Each time the button is pressed, the recep-tion band will change as follows:

Seek tuningPress the seek Up button (2) or the seekDown button (3).The unit stops searching for a station at afrequency where a broadcast station isavailable.

Manual tuningTurn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (4).The frequency being received is displayed.

Preset memory1) Select the desired station.2) Hold down a desired button ([1] to [6])

of the Preset buttons (5) to which youwant to store the station for 2 secondsor longer.

Auto storeHold down the /AST button (6) for 1 sec-onds or longer.Six stations in good reception will automat-ically be stored to the Preset buttons (5) inorder, starting from a station whose fre-quency is the lowest.

NOTE:• Auto store can be released by pressing

AST button (6) while auto store is underway.

• When the auto store is performed, thestation previously stored in the memoryat the position is overwritten.

• When there are fewer than 6 stationsthat can be stored even if 1 round ofauto store operation is performed, nostation will be stored at the remainingPreset buttons (6). Remaining presetdisplays “------”.

• 6 stations can be preset for FM1 andFM2 in common, and 6 stations for AMin auto store mode.

Radio ReceptionRadio reception can be affected by envi-ronment, atmospheric conditions, or radiosignal’s power and distance from the sta-tion. Nearby mountains and buildings mayinterfere or deflect radio reception, causingpoor reception. Poor reception or radiostatic can also be caused by electric cur-rent from overhead wires or high voltagepower lines.

FM1 FM2 AM

5-39


82PH0-74E

Listening to a CD

82PH05025

(2) (1)

(3)

(7) (6)

(4)

(8)

(5)

AST

SETUP

USB MODE

3 4 5 621

Display

(1) Insertion slot(2) Eject button(3) Mode button(4) Up button(5) Down button(6) RPT button(7) RDM button(8) DISP button

(A) Track number(B) Play time

NOTE:This product does not support 8 cm CD(sometimes called as “mini single CD”, “3-inch CD”, “CD3”, etc.).

(B)

(A)

5-40


82PH0-74E

• CDs or CD-ROMs carrying no mark (A)cannot be used.

• Some discs recorded in CD-R/CD-RWformat may sometimes be impossible touse.

• A CD is to be inserted with its label sideup.

• When there is a CD already in the unit, itis impossible to insert another CD with-out ejecting the CD in the unit. Do notuse force to insert a CD into the CDinsertion slot.

Loading a CDInsert a CD in the Insertion slot (1).When a CD is loaded, play starts.

Ejecting a CDPress the Eject button (2).When the ignition mode is “LOCK”, the CDremained ejected for around 15 seconds orlonger will automatically be drawn insidethe unit. (Auto reload function)The backup eject function:This function allows you to eject a CD bypressing the Eject button (2) even whenthe ignition mode is off.

Listening to a CDWhen a CD is inserted, playback will auto-matically start.When a CD is already inside the unit,press the MODE button (3) to enter the CDmode & start playback.

Selecting a track• Press the Up button (4) to listen to the

next track.• Press the Down button (5) twice to listen

to the previous track.When the Down button (5) is pressedonce, the track currently being playedwill start from the beginning again.

Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track• Hold down the Up button (4) to fast for-

ward the track.• Hold down the Down button (5) to fast

rewind the track.

(A)

NOTICE• Never insert your finger or hand

into the CD insertion slot. Neverinsert foreign objects.

• Never insert a CD with glue comingout from adhesive tape or a rentalCD label or with a trace indicatingthat adhesive tape or a rental CDlabel has been removed. This maycause the CD not to eject or resultin a malfunction.

NOTICEIf you forcefully try to push anejected CD inside the unit before autoreloading, the disc surface might bescratched.When reloading a CD, remove it fromthe unit completely before reloading.

5-41


82PH0-74E

Random playbackPress the RDM button (7).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

• TRACK RANDOMThe random indicator “RDM” will light.The tracks in the loaded disc will beplayed in random order.

Repeat playbackPress the RPT button (6).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

• TRACK REPEATThe repeat indicator “RPT” will light.The track currently being played will beplayed repeatedly.

Display changePress the DISP button (8).Each time the button is pressed, displaywill change as follows:

NOTE:• “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there

is no text information in the disc currentlybeing played.

• If text data contains more than 15 char-acters, the “>” mark will appear at theright end. Audio displays text informationthree times automatically. Later holdingdown the DISP button (8) for 1 second orlonger can display the next page for onetime only.

OFF TRACK RANDOM

OFF TRACK REPEAT

Play time

Disc title

Track title

5-42


82PH0-74E

Listening to an MP3/WMA Disc

82PH05026

(1)

(5) (4)

(2)

(6)

(3)

AST

SETUP

USB MODE

3 4 5 621

Display

(1) TUNE FOLDER, knob(2) Up button(3) Down button(4) RPT button(5) RDM button(6) DISP button

(A) Folder number(B) Track number(C) Play time(D) DISC type

(C)

(B)(A)

(D)

5-43


82PH0-74E

Selecting a folderTurn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect a folder.






rewind the track.


• FOLDER RANDOMThe random indicator “F.RDM” will light.The tracks in the current folder will beplayed in random order.

• ALL RANDOMThe random indicator “RDM” will light.The tracks in the loaded disc will beplayed in random order.


• FILE REPEATThe repeat indicator “RPT” will light.The track currently being played will beplayed repeatedly.

• FOLDER REPEATThe repeat indicator “F.RPT” will light.All tracks in the currently selected folderwill be played repeatedly.

OFF FOLDER.RANDOM ALL RANDOM OFF FILE REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT

5-44


82PH0-74E



is no text information in the disc currentlybeing played.

• If text data contains more than 15 char-acters, the “>” mark will appear at theright end. Audio displays text informationthree times automatically. Later holdingdown the DISP button(6) or 1 second orlonger can display the next page for onetime only.

Notes on MP3/WMAWhat is MP3?• MP3 (MPEG audio layer3) is an audio

compression format that has becomethe standard format among PC users. Itsmerit is that the original audio data iscompressed to approximately 1/10 andhigh sound quality is maintained. Thismeans that it is possible to store the dataof approximately 10 music CDs on a sin-gle CD-R/RW disc, which in turn makesit possible to play music for a long timewithout having to change the disc.

What is WMA?• An abbreviation of “Windows Media

Audio,” WMA is an audio compressionformat developed by Microsoft.

• WMA files for which the DRM (DigitalRights Management) function is ON can-not be played.

• Windows MediaTM and the Windows®

logo are trademarks or registered trade-marks of Microsoft Corporation in theUnited States and other countries.

Points to remember when making MP3/WMA files Common• High bit rate and high sampling fre-

quency are recommended for high qual-ity sounds.

• Selecting VBR (Variable Bit Rate) is notrecommended. Selecting VBR maycause display of incorrect playing timeand jumpiness of playback.

• Playback sound quality varies depend-ing on the encoding environment. Fordetails, refer to the user manual of theencoding software and the writing soft-ware in use.

Recording MP3/WMA files on a CDmedia• It is recommended not to write both CD-

DA files and MP3/WMA files on a disc.• If both CD-DA files and MP3/WMA files

are on the same disc, tracks may not beplayed in the correct order or sometracks may not be played at all.

Play time

Folder name

File name

Album name (MP3, WMA only)

Track title

Artist nameNOTICE

Never assign the “.mp3”, or “.wma”file name extension to a file if it is notin the MP3/WMA format file. Failure toobserve this may result in damage tothe speaker due to noise production.

5-45


82PH0-74E

• When storing both MP3 data and WMAdata on the same disc, sort and placethem in different folders.

• Do not write files other than MP3/WMAfiles and unnecessary folders on a disc.

• MP3/WMA files should be named tomeet the standards and the file systemspecifications as shown below.

• The file extension “.mp3”, or “.wma”should be assigned to files based ontheir format independently.

• You may encounter a trouble in playingMP3/WMA files or displaying informationof MP3/WMA files depending on the writ-ing software or CD recorder in use.

• This unit does not have a play list func-tion.

• It is recommended to write discs in Disc-at-Once mode even though Multi-ses-sion mode is supported.

Compression formatsMP3• Bit rate:

MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k - 320 kbps MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps• Sampling frequency:

MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k/44.1 k/48kHz



WMA (Ver. 7, Ver. 8, Ver. 9*)• Bit rate: 5 ~ 384 kbps• Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz

Supported file systemsISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, Romeo

Maximum number of files/folders• Maximum number of files: 999• Maximum number of files in a folder: 999• Maximum depth of tree structure: 99• Maximum number of folders: 99

(Root folder is included.)

Recording MP3/WMA files on a CD• Playback or display may not be possible

depending on the type of CD in use orthe condition of the recording.

Depending on the connected CD memory,the files may be played in different orderfrom the order that the files were stored.

5-46


82PH0-74E

Listening to files stored in a USB device

82PH05027

(2)

(1)

(6) (5)

(3)

(7)

(4)

AST

SETUP

USB MODE

3 4 5 621

Display

(1) USB button(2) TUNE FOLDER, knob(3) Up button(4) Down button(5) RPT button(6) RDM button(7) DISP button

(A) Folder number(B) Track number(C) Play time(D) File type

NOTICEDo not connect any USB device otherthan a USB memory or a USB audioplayer. Do not connect multiple USBdevices to the USB connector using aUSB hub, etc. Supplying power tomultiple USB devices from the con-nector could cause overheating andsmoking.

(C)

(B)(A)

(D)

5-47


82PH0-74E

Selecting a USB device modePress the USB device mode (1).

Selecting a folderTurn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (2) toselect the desired folder.


next track.Press the Down button (4) twice to listento the previous track.When the Down button (4) is pressedonce, the track currently being playedwill start from the beginning again.



rewind the track.


• FOLDER RANDOMThe random indicator “F.RDM” will light.

The tracks in the currently selectedfolder will be played in random order.

• ALL RANDOMThe random indicator “RDM” will light.The tracks in the connected USB devicewill be played in random order.


• FILE REPEATThe repeat indicator “RPT” will light.The track currently being played will beplayed repeatedly.

• FOLDER REPEATThe repeat indicator “F.RPT” will light.All the tracks in the folder currentlyselected will be played repeatedly.



is no text information in the file currentlybeing played.

• If text data contains more than 15 char-acters, the “>” mark will appear at theright end. Audio displays text informationthree times automatically. Later holdingdown the DISP button (7) for 1 second orlonger can display the next page for onetime only.

OFF FOLDER RANDOM ALL RANDOM

OFF FILE REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT

Play time

Folder name

File name

Album name (MP3, WMA, AAC only)

Track title

Artist name

5-48


82PH0-74E

Notes on USB deviceCompatible USB devices• USB Mass Storage Class

For details as to whether your USBmemory/USB Audio is compatible withUSB Mass Storage Class, please con-tact the USB memory/USB Audio manu-facturer.

• USB Standard Compatibility 1.1/2.0 FullSpeed

• File System FAT12/16/32• Maximum current less than 1.0 A• If devices such as USB hub, extension

cable are connected to the audio sys-tem, it may not be recognized. In suchcase connect the USB device directly tothe audio system.

• Devices such as MP3 player/Mobilephone/digital camera may not be recog-nized by the audio system for playingmusic.

• Device (Smart phone) featuring MediaTransfer protocol (MTP), music searchcan take long time. This depends on thedevice (Smart phone) type and the files/folders present in the device (Smartphone).

USB device connection• When connecting a USB device, make

sure that the connector is pushed all theway into the port.

• Do not leave the USB device for longperiods of time in places inside the vehi-cle where the temperature can rise toohigh.

• Back up any important data beforehand.We cannot accept responsibility for anylost data.

• It is recommended not to connect a USBdevice that contains data files other thanMP3/WMA/AAC format.

Recording MP3/WMA/AAC files on aUSB device• Playback or display may not be possible

depending on the type of USB device inuse or the condition of the recording.

• Depending on the connected USB mem-ory, the files may be played in differentorder from the order that the files werestored.

Compression formatsMP3• Bit rate:

MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k - 320 kbps MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps• Sampling frequency:




WMA (Ver. 7, Ver. 8, Ver. 9*)• Bit rate: 5 ~ 384 kbps• Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz

AAC (compliant to ISO/IEC 14496-3)• Bit rate: 8k - 384 kbbs including VBR

Sampling frequency: 8 - 96 kHz

Maximum number of files/folders• Maximum number of files: 5000• Maximum number of files in a folder:

5000• Maximum depth of tree structure: 1000• Maximum number of folders: 1000

(Root folder is included.)

Notes on AACWhat is AAC?An abbreviation of “Advanced Audio Cod-ing,” AAC is an audio compression formatused by MPEG2 and MPEG4.

5-49


82PH0-74E

Listening to an iPod®

82PH05028

(2)

(1)

(6) (5)

(3)

(7)

(4)

(8)

AST

SETUP

USB MODE

3 4 5 621

Display

82PH05035

(1) USB button(2) TUNE FOLDER, knob(3) Up button(4) Down button(5) RPT button(6) RDM button(7) DISP button(8) Preset buttons ([1] to [6])


Selecting an iPod® modePress the USB button (1).




(B)(A)

5-50


82PH0-74E



rewind the track.


• SONG RANDOMThe random indicator “RDM” will light.The tracks in the iPod® will be played inrandom order.


• SONG REPEATThe repeat indicator “RPT” will light.The track currently being played will beplayed repeatedly.


NOTE:If text data contains more than 15 charac-ters, the “>” mark will appear at the rightend. Audio displays text information threetimes automatically. Later holding downthe DISP button (7) for 1 second or longercan display the next page for one timeonly.

OFF SONG RANDOM

OFF SONG REPEAT Track title /Play time Artist name /Track title

Album name /Track title

5-51


82PH0-74E

Playing Mode selection1) Press the menu button numbered [1] of

the Preset buttons (8) for 1 second orlonger.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (2).Each time the knob is turned, the modewill change as follows:

3) Press the TUNE FOLDER, knob (2)to select the desired mode.

NOTE:• When the button numbered [5] or [6] of

the Preset buttons (8) is pressed, theprevious mode will be displayed.

Notes on iPod®Supported iPod®

• iPod® touch (6th generation)• iPod® touch (5th generation)• iPod® touch (4rd generation)• iPod® touch (3rd generation)• iPod® touch (2nd generation)• iPod® touch (1st generation)• iPod® classic• iPod® nano (7th generation)• iPod® nano (6th generation)• iPod® nano (5th generation)• iPod® nano (4th generation)• iPod® nano (3rd generation)• iPod® nano (2nd generation)• iPod® nano (1st generation)• iPhone® 6 Plus• iPhone® 6• iPhone® 5S• iPhone® 5• iPhone® 4S• iPhone® 4• iPhone® 3GS* Some functions may not be available

depending on the model of iPod®.* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.* iPhone® is a trademark of Apple Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other coun-tries.

* Apple is not responsible for the opera-tion of this device or its compliance withsafety and regulatory standards.

iPod® connection• Make sure to detach the iPod® after

turning the ignition switch to the “LOCK”position. The iPod® may not be shutdown when it is being connected andmay result in battery depletion.

• Please do not connect iPod® accesso-ries such as an iPod® remote control orheadphones while connecting the iPod®

with the unit. The unit may not operatecorrectly.PLAYLIST

ARTIST

ALBUM

SONGS

POD CAST

GENRE

AUDIOBOOK

5-52


82PH0-74E

AUX Function

82PH05029

(1) MODE button

(1)

AST

SETUP

USB MODE

3 4 5 621

AUX connectionTo listen to auxiliary audio sources (soldseparately) through the unit, follow theinstruction below.1) Connect the auxiliary audio source to

the AUX/USB socket (separatelyattached) with an AUX cable.

2) Each time the button is pressed, themode will change as follows:

CAUTION• Before connection, mute the unit,

and also keep the volume of theauxiliary audio source within arange that will not cause distortion.

• When the audio source is turnedoff, noise may be emitted. Be sureto turn off the unit or switch toanother mode before turning off theaudio source.

CD (if equipped)

Bluetooth® audio

AUX (if equipped)

5-53


82PH0-74E

NOTE:• Please consult your place of purchase

for details about whether a given auxil-iary audio source can be connected andthe proper auxiliary cord to use.

• The volume and tone controls of theauxiliary audio source can be adjustedon the unit.

5-54


82PH0-74E

Bluetooth® Hands-Free (if equipped)

82PH05030

(1) TUNE FOLDER, knob(2) VOL PUSH POWER, knob(3) Preset buttons

(2)(1)

(6)(5)

(4)

(3)

AST

SETUP

USB MODE

3 4 5 621

Steering switch (for type-2 Audio)

(4) Bluetooth® setup button(5) Off Hook button(6) On Hook button(7) VOL switch

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

5-55


82PH0-74E

Phone registrationTo use the hands-free function with thisunit, it is required to register the phone inadvance1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1)to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and pressthe knob (1) to determine the selection.

3) Select “Pairing”, and press the knob (1)to determine the selection.

4) Select “Maruti Suzuki” from the Blue-tooth® menu of the phone and establishthe pairing.Refer to the manual of the phone in usefor further information.

5) Enter the Passkey displayed on the unitto the phone, if required.

6) Press the On Hook button (6) to exit BTSetup menu.

NOTE:• When selecting “Go Back” option or

button, the previous menu will be dis-played.

• When additionally registering a phone,operate the same step from 1).

• Up to 5 phones can be registered.• To set up a new phone, disconnect the

current audio player from the unit, Con-nect the device again after phone setupis completed if necessary.

• When failed to establish the pairingwithin 60 seconds, the connecting oper-ation will be canceled. “Connection

failed” will be displayed. Please try againor refer to the manual of the phone inuse for how to establish the pairing withthe phone.

• Bluetooth/Telephone setup mode can beentered only during vehicle is stationary(or speed less than ~ 8 kmph)

Receiving a callPress the Off Hook button (5) to receive acall.

Ending a callPress the On Hook button (6) to end a call.

Rejecting a call (only for supportedmodels)Press the On Hook button (6) to reject aincoming call.

Adjusting the listening volume• Turn the VOL PUSH POWER, knob

(2) during a call.Turning it clockwise increases the vol-ume; turning it counterclockwisedecreases the volume.

• Press the VOL switch (7) during a call.Pressing “+” of the switch increases thevolume, pressing “-” of the switchdecreases the volume.

5-56


82PH0-74E

Adjusting the ring volume• Turn the VOL PUSH POWER, knob (2)

while a call coming in.Turning it clockwise increases the vol-ume; turning it counterclockwisedecreases the volume.

• Press the VOL switch (7) during a call.Pressing “+” of the switch increases thevolume, pressing “-” of the switchdecreases the volume.

Adjusting the call or ringtone volumeFollow the instructions below to adjust thecall or ringtone volume.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).


2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Setup Telephone”, and pressthe knob (1) to determine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Sound Setting”, and press theknob (1) to determine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Call Volume” or “Ringtone Vol-ume”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.The current call or ringtone volume willbe displayed.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect desired call or ringtone volume,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back” option or but-ton, the previous menu will be displayed.

Selecting the RingtoneFollow the instructions below to select aringtone.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Sound Setting”, and press theknob (1) to determine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Ringtone”, and press the knob(1) to determine the selection. The cur-rent ringtone will be displayed.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect desired ringtone, and press theknob (1) to determine the selection.


Registration in PhonebookRegistration of numbers in the phonebook.Follow the instructions below to registerphone numbers in the Phonebook of theunit.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Setup Phonebook”, and pressthe knob (1) to determine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Add Contacts”, and press theknob (1) to determine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Overwrite All” and press theknob (1) to determine the selection.

6) Press or turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) to select “Confirm”, and pressthe knob (1) to determine the selection.

7) When contacts are transferred, “Trans-ferred” will be displayed followed by“Setup Phonebook” display.

5-57


82PH0-74E


button the previous menu will be dis-played.

• Up to 1000 numbers can be registered inPhonebook.

Transfer of call history (Call History)Follow the instructions below to transfercall history of the registered phone.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Call History”, and press theknob (1) to determine the selection.

4) Select “Overwrite Call History?”, andpress the knob (1) to determine theselection.

5) Select “Confirm”, and press the knob(1) to transfer the call history from thephone.


Making a call by PhonebookFollow the instructions below to dial a num-ber registered in Phonebook.1) Press the Off Hook button (5).

The Bluetooth® phonebook menu willbe displayed. Press the knob (1) todetermine the selection

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect the initial of the name you wouldlike to make a call, and press the knob(1) to determine the selection. The registered name will be displayedin sequence. If name have been regis-tered together with numbers, thenames will be displayed.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Dial”, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection.

4) The number registered with the dis-played name will be dialed.

NOTE:• In case phonebook contact have more

than one number then audio will ask forparticular number selection.

Registration in speed dialFollow the instructions below to assign anumber to one of the Preset buttons to useas the speed dial.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).




4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Add Speed Dial”, and press theknob (1) to determine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect the initial of a registered contactto be assigned, and press the knob (1)to determine the selection.

6) “Choose Preset” will be displayed.Press one of the Preset buttons (3) towhich the selected number is to beassigned. “Registered” will be dis-played.

7) If a number is already assigned to theselected button, a confirmation mes-sage will be displayed. Turn the TUNEFOLDER, knob (1) to select “Con-firm”, and press the knob (1) to com-plete the assignment.When the assignment is completed, the“Add Speed Dial” will be displayed.

5-58


82PH0-74E



• In case phonebook contact have morethan one number then audio will ask forparticular number selection.

One-touch call (Speed dial)Follow the instructions below to dial thenumber assigned to each of the Presetbuttons (3).1) Press the Off Hook button (5).

The Bluetooth® phonebook menu willbe displayed.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Speed Dials”, and press theknob (1) to determine the selection.

3) Press one of the Preset buttons (3). When no number is assigned, “NoEntry” is displayed.

4) Press the knob (1) “DIAL” will be dis-played. Press the knob (1) to determinethe selection.

Deletion of speed dial (Del Speed Dial)To delete a number assigned for the speeddial, follow the instructions below.1) Press the Off Hook button (5).

The Bluetooth® phonebook menu willbe displayed.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Speed Dials”, and press theknob (1) to determine the selection.

3) Press one of the Preset buttons (3) towhich the number to be deleted isassigned. “No Entry” appears if the number is notregistered.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Delete”, and press the knob (1)to determine the selection.

5) Select “Del Speed Dial”, and press theknob (1) to determine the selection.

6) Select “Confirm”, and press the knob(1) to complete the deletion.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back” option or but-ton, the previous menu will be displayed

Dialing using Missed/Incoming/Outgoing CallsFollow the instructions below to dial to thelast dialed number again.NOTE:Up to 10 phone numbers of the latest callscan be stored. (10 each for dialed,received and missed call)

1) Press the Off Hook button (5).The Bluetooth® phonebook menu willbe displayed.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Outgoing Calls”, “IncomingCalls” or “Missed Calls”, and press theknob (1) to determine the selection.To dial from the dialed history or thereceived history, select “OutgoingCalls”, “Incoming Calls” or “MissedCalls” respectively.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect the desired number or registeredname and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

4) Press the knob (1) to dial to theselected number.

5-59


82PH0-74E



• Pressing “Choose Preset” after selecting“Add Speed Dial” can register theselected number in the speed dial.

• Pressing “Confirm” after selecting“Delete” can delete the selected numberfrom the call history.

Deletion of call historyFollow the instructions below to delete amissed/incoming/outgoing call history.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).

Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1).Select “Setup telephone” and press theknob (1) to determine the selection.


3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Delete History”, and press theknob (1) to determine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Outgoing Calls”, “IncomingCalls”, “Missed Calls” or “ALL Calls”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect a number to be deleted or “ALLCalls”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

6) Select “Delete?” or “Delete All?”, incase of “ALL” will be selected and pressthe knob (1) to determine the selection.

7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Confirm”, and press the knob (1)to complete the deletion.


Deletion of registered data (DeleteEntry)Follow the instructions below to delete anumber registered in Phonebook.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).




4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Delete Contacts”, and press theknob (1) to determine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect the initial of the name of the reg-istered number to be deleted or “ALL”and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

6) Select “Delete?” or “Delete All?”, andpress the knob (1) to determine theselection.

7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Confirm”, and press the knob (1)to complete the deletion.


Display of device data (Device Name)Follow the instructions below to display theBD (Bluetooth® Device) address anddevice name.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).


2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Setup Bluetooth”, and press theknob (1) to determine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Bluetooth Info”, and press theknob (1) to determine the selection.

4) Select “Device Name” or “DeviceAddress”, and press the knob (1) to dis-play the device name or the BD (Blue-tooth® Device) address.


5-60


82PH0-74E

Reset to the factory defaultsFollow the instructions below to reset allthe settings to the factory defaults.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Initialize”, and press the knob(1) to determine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “All Initialize”, and press the knob(1) to determine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Confirm”, and press the knob (1)to start the reset “initialized” will be dis-played.


Selection of phone (Select Phone)Follow the instructions below to select aphone to be paired with from the registeredphones.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “List Phone”, and press the knob(1) to determine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect a phone to be paired with, andpress the knob (1) to determine theselection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Select”, and press the knob (1)to determine the selection.



• The Bluetooth® ready audio device willbe disconnected when the phone isselected.

List of phones (List Phones)Follow the instructions below to display thenames of the registered phones insequence.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “List Phone”, and press the knob(1) to determine the selection.The names of the registered phonesare displayed.


5-61


82PH0-74E

Passkey setting (Set Passkey)Follow the instructions below to set thesecurity number (Passkey).1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Passkey”, and press the knob(1) to determine the selection.

4) Select “New Passkey”, and press theknob (1) to determine the selection.

5) Press the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1)to select “Confirm”.

6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect a number for the first digit, andpress the knob (1) to determine theselection. Select and determine num-bers for the second, third and fourthdigits in order in the same manner.

7) After entering fourth digit, press knob(1) to confirm. Passkey “XXXX” will bedisplayed.


Deletion of phone information (DeletePhone)Follow the instructions below to delete theregistered information of the phone.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “List Phone”, and press the knob(1) to determine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect a phone to be deleted, and pressthe knob (1) to determine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Delete”, and press the knob (1)to determine the selection.

6) Select “Delete?”, and press the knob(1) to determine the selection.

7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “Confirm”, and press the knob (1)to determine the selection.


BT function on/off (BT Power)Follow the instructions below to turn on/offthe Bluetooth® function.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1) toselect “BT Power”, and press the knob(1) to determine the selection.

4) Press the TUNE FOLDER, knob (1)to select “BT Power On” or “BT PowerOff”.

NOTE:• When the BT function is turned off, the

connection between this unit and theregistered phone in use will be discon-nected.

• When selecting “Go Back” option orbutton, the previous menu will be dis-played.

5-62


82PH0-74E

Bluetooth® audio (if equipped)

82PH05031

NOTE:Applicable for Bluetooth® audio version 2.1 + EDR

(2)

(1)

(3)

(6)

(4)

(5)AST

SETUP

USB MODE

3 4 5 621

Steering switch (If equipped)

Display

(1) MODE button(2) TUNE FOLDER, knob(3) Up button(4) Down button(5) DISP button(6) Bluetooth® setup button


(6)

(B)

(A)

5-63


82PH0-74E

Registration of audio devicesTo use Bluetooth® ready audio deviceswith this unit, it is required to register thedevices.NOTE:• To set up a new audio player, disconnect

the phone from the unit. Connect thephone after audio player setup is com-pleted if necessary.

• When failed to establish the connectionwithin 60 seconds, the connecting oper-ation will be canceled. Please try againor refer to the audio player manual forassistance with the pairing process.

1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6). The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.


3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER, knob (2) toselect “Pairing”, and press the knob (2)to determine the selection.

4) Select “Maruti Suzuki” from the Blue-tooth® menu of the audio player andestablish the pairing.Refer to the manual of the audio playerin use for further information.

5) Enter the Passkey displayed on the unitto the audio player. (For phones withBluetooth version 2.1 or above passkeyinput is not required.



• When additionally registering audiodevices, operate the same step from 1).

Selecting the Bluetooth® audio modePress the MODE button (1).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:






rewind the track.NOTE:Some functions may not be availabledepending on Bluetooth® audio.


NOTE:If text data contains more than 15 charac-ters, the “>” mark will appear at the rightend. Audio displays text information threetimes automatically. Later holding downthe DISP button (5) for 1 second or longercan display the next page for one timeonly.

CD (if equipped)

Bluetooth® audio

AUX (if equipped)Play time

Track name

Artist name

Album name

5-64


82PH0-74E

Disclaimer for Bluetooth® function• Depending on the mobile phone models,

some phones may not be compatiblefully or partially (some function may berestricted).

• Connectivity or voice quality may getaffected depending on circumstances.

• After the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position the audio system takesfew seconds to detect and connect tothe Bluetooth® device (if already paired).

• Make sure that you are aware of allapplicable local laws and accordinglyuse Bluetooth device.

Remote Audio Controls(if equipped)Controlling of basic functions of the audiosystem is available using the switches onthe steering wheel.

Adjusting the volume• To increase the volume, hold down “+” of

the VOL switch (1). The volume will keepon being increased until the switch isreleased.

• To decrease the volume, hold down “-” ofthe VOL switch (1). The volume will keepon being decreased until the switch isreleased.

• To mute the sound, press the switch (2).

Selecting the modePress the switch (3).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

It is possible to turn on the audio systemby pressing the switch (3).

(2) (3)

(1) (4) FM1

FM2

AM

CD (if equipped)

Bluetooth® audio (if equipped)

AUX (if equipped)

USB (iPod®) (if equipped)

5-65


82PH0-74E

Selecting the radio station (FM1, FM2,AM mode)• To select the next preset station, press

“ ” of the switch (4) only for a moment.• To select the previous preset station,

press “ ” of the switch (4) only for amoment.

• To scan a higher frequency radio station,press “ ” of the switch (4) for 1 secondor longer.

• To scan a lower frequency radio station,press “ ” of the switch (4) for 1 secondor longer.

Selecting the track (CD, USB (iPod®),Bluetooth® audio mode)• To skip to the next track, press “ ” of the

switch (4) only for a moment.• To skip to the previous track, press “ ” of

the switch (4) twice only for a moment.When the switch (4) is pushed downonce only for a moment, the track cur-rently being played will start from thebeginning again.

Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track• To fast forward, press “ ” of the switch

(4) for 1 second or longer.• To fast rewind, press “ ” of the switch (4)

for 1 second or longer.

<

<

<

<

<

<

<

<

5-66


82PH0-74E

Anti-Theft Feature

82PH05032

(4)

(3)

(1)

(2)

AST

SETUP

USB MODE

3 4 5 621

(1) VOL PUSH POWER, knob(2) Preset buttons ([1] to [6])(3) Up button(4) TUNE FOLDER, knob

5-67


82PH0-74E

The anti-theft function is intended to dis-courage thefts, such as that the audio sys-tem becomes inoperable when it isinstalled on other vehicles.This function works by entering a PersonalIdentification Number (PIN).When the unit is disconnected from itspower source, such as when the audiosystem is removed or the battery is discon-nected, the unit will become inoperableuntil the PIN is reentered.

Setting the Anti-Theft Function1) Long press the VOL PUSH POWER,

knob (1) to power off.2) Hold down the buttons numbered [1]

and [6] of the Preset buttons (2) simul-taneously, “SECURITY” will be dis-played.

3) Press the Up button (3) and the buttonnumbered [1] of the Preset buttons (2)simultaneously.

4) Enter a 4-digit number to be registeredas PIN using the buttons numbered [1] -[4] of the Preset buttons (2).

5) Hold down the TUNE FOLDER, knob(4) for 1 second or longer to set theanti-theft function. “Complete” will bedisplayed”.

NOTE:Take a note of the registered PIN and keepit for the future use.

Canceling the anti-theft featureTo cancel the anti-theft function, delete theregistered PIN.1) Long press the VOL PUSH POWER,

knob (1) to power off.2) Hold down the buttons numbered [1]

and [6] of the Preset buttons (2) simul-taneously, “PIN ENTRY” will be dis-played.



5) Hold down the TUNE FOLDER, knob(4) for 1 second or longer to delete theregistered PIN. The indication “----” willbe displayed and the anti-theft functionwill be canceled.

NOTE:To change your PIN, first delete your cur-rent PIN, then set a new one.

Confirming the Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)When the main power source is discon-nected such as when the battery isreplaced, etc, it is required to enter the PINto make the unit operable again.1) Set the ignition switch to the “ACC”

position. “SECURITY” will be displayed.



4) Hold down TUNE FOLDER, knob (4)for 1 second or longer. When the PIN same as registered isentered, the power of the audio systemwill be turned off automatically and itwill become operable again.

NOTE:If an incorrect PIN is entered, “ERROR”and the total number of incorrect entryattempts will be displayed.If an incorrect PIN is entered 10 times,“HELP” will be displayed and the audiosystem will become inoperable.

5-68


82PH0-74E

Battery Installation

Install a lithium battery (CR2025) with the poles facing the correct direction.

Battery replacement timing• When battery power is depleted, the button may not be operable. If the remote controller

does not operate, replace the battery and check the operation.

Caution on battery• Be sure to follow the instructions to prevent battery leakage, over-heating, ignition or

explosion.

If battery leakage has occurred, wipe thecontainer first then install a new battery. Ifthe battery solution contacts the skin, washoff with water completely.Caution on Remote Controller• Do not leave the remote controller in an

area exposed to direct sunlight, such ason the dashboard or steering wheel. Theremote controller may deform becauseof the heat, (Be especially careful of thedashboard exposed to direct sunlight inthe summer, as it will become extremelyhot).

WARNING• Do not expose the battery to flame.

Do not short circuit, disassemble,or heat the battery.

• Do not charge the battery.• Use the specified type battery.• Keep the button-shaped battery

away from children to prevent acci-dental swallowing.

• If the battery is swallowed, contacta doctor immediately.

CAUTION• Install the battery with the poles

facing the correct direction.• When not in use for a long period

of time, or if the battery is dead,remove the battery from the remotecontroller.

5-69


82PH0-74E

• When the vehicle is parked in an areaexposed to direct sunlight, Ensure theremote controller is placed in an area notexposed to direct sunlight. For example:Glove box.Under direct sunlight, signal receptionfrom the remote controller weakens. Ifthis happens, hold the remote controllerclose to the signal receptor on the frontpanel.

5-70


82PH0-74E

Remote ControllerCommon operations

• In Sound ModePress to adjust the sound.(bass/treble/balance/fader)

• In Preset-EQ ModeThe Preset-EQ setting switches as follows:

• In AVC ModeThe AVC setting switches as follows:

TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button

OFF (FLAT)

ROCK

CLASSIC

POP

JAZZ

HIP-HOP

OFF

LEVEL 1

LEVEL 2

LEVEL 3

1

54 6

32

DISP

MODE

ENTFLD UP

FLDDOWN

MENURDMRPT

ASSOUND

Power ON / OFFPOWER button

• Press to adjust volume.(including at AUX mode)

VOLUME button

• Press to mute the sound. Press it again to cancelthe mute.

MUTE button

• Press to switch to the Preset-EQ Mode.

• In Preset-EQ mode Sound setting switches asfollow:

SOUND button

ENT button

Preset-EQ

BASS

MID

TREBLE

BALANCE

FADER

AVC

• The mode switches asfollows:

MODE button

FM1

FM2

AM

CD (if equipped)

Bluetooth® audio

AUX (if equipped)

USB (iPod®) (if equipped)

5-71


82PH0-74E

Radio operations

1

54 6

32

DISP

MODE

ENTFLD UP

FLDDOWN

MENURDMRPT

ASSOUND

NOTE:When there are fewer than 6 stations that can be stored even if 1 round of auto store operation is performed, no station will bestored at the remaining preset buttons.

• Press to return to the last received fre-quency in the previous auto store mode.

• Press it for 2 seconds or longer. It selectsthe stations with the stronger signals andstores them in order.

AS button• Press to select the radio station.SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button

• Press to select the desired preset station.PRESET buttons (1-6)

5-72


82PH0-74E

CD operations

1

54 6

32

DISP

MODE

ENTFLD UP

FLDDOWN

MENURDMRPT

ASSOUND

• Press to play the current track randomly.Press it again to cancel.

RDM (2) button

• Press to plays the current track repeatedly.Press it again to cancel.

RPT (1) button

• Press to skip to the next/previous track.• Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/

fast-rewind the track.

SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button

• The display switches as follows:

• Press it for 1 second or longer to display thenext page.

DISP button

Play time

Disc title

Track title

5-73


82PH0-74E

MP3/WMA Disc operations

1

54 6

32

DISP

MODE

ENTFLD UP

FLDDOWN

MENURDMRPT

ASSOUND

The random mode switches as follows:RDM (2) button

OFF

FOLDER RANDOM

ALL RANDOM

The repeat mode switches as follows:RPT (1) button

OFF

FILE FOLDER

FOLDER REPEAT

• Press to skip to the next/previous folder.TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button


• Press it for 1 second or longer to display the nextpage.

DISP button

Play time

Folder name

File name

Album name (MP3, WMA only)

Track title

Artist name

• Press to skip to the next/previous track.• Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/fast-

rewind the track.


5-74


82PH0-74E

USB operations

1

54 6

32

DISP

MODE

ENTFLD UP

FLDDOWN

MENURDMRPT

ASSOUND

• Press to skip to the next/previous file.• Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/fast-

rewind the file.


The repeat mode switches as follows:RPT (1) button

OFF

FILE REPEAT

FOLDER REPEAT



DISP button

Play time

Folder name

File name

Album name (MP3, WMA, AAC only)

Track title

Artist name

• Press to skip to the next/previous folder.TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button


OFF

FOLDER RANDOM

ALL RANDOM

5-75


82PH0-74E

iPod operations

1

54 6

32

DISP

MODE

ENTFLD UP

FLDDOWN

MENURDMRPT

ASSOUND

• While displaying iPod® menu, press to select thedesired item and display the list. When a track isselected from the list, the playback starts.

ENT button

• Press to play the current track repeatedly.Press it again to cancel.

RPT (1) button



DISP button

Track tittle / Play time

Artist name / Track title

Album name / Track title

• During playback Press to display iPod menu.• Press it for 1 second or longer to display the top menu.

While iPod menu is displayed

MENU button

• While displaying iPod® menu, press to dis-play the next/previous list in the same layer.

TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button

• Press to skip to the next/previous file.• Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/fast-

rewind the file.



OFF

SONG RANDOM

5-76


82PH0-74E

TroubleshootingWhen encountered a problem, check and follow the instructions as described below.If the described suggestions do not solve the problem, it is recommended to take the unit to your authorised MARUTI SUZUKI workshop.

Problem Possible cause Possible solution

Common

Unable to operate The security function is on.When “SECURITY” is displayed, enterthe ID.When “HELP” is displayed, contact yourauthorised MARUTI SUZUKI workshop.

Unable to turn on the power (no sound).(No sound is produced) Fuse is blown. Contact your authorized MARUTI

SUZUKI workshop.

Radio

High noise It may not be exactly tuned in to the sta-tion. Tune it in exactly to the station.

Unable to receive by auto tuning There may be no station emitting signalspowerful enough. Pick up a station by manual tuning.

CD

Sound skips or noise producedThe disc is dirty. Wipe the disc with a soft cloth.

The disc has a major scratch or iswarped.

Replace the disc with the one with noscratch and also not warped.

5-77


82PH0-74E

MP3/WMA/AAC

No playback The disc contains unsupported formatteddata. Check the file format.

Sound skips or noise produced Sound skipping may occur when playingVBR (Variable Bit Rate) files. It is not recommended to play VBR files.

USB

Playback does not start when the USBdevice is connected.

There is no supported format file to playon this unit. Check the file format.

The current consumption of the USBdevice exceeds 1.0 A.

Use an USB device with a current con-sumption lower than 1.0 A.

Bluetooth®

Pairing failed

The distance between this unit and theBluetooth® ready device is too far, or ametallic object may be located betweenthe Bluetooth® ready device and this unit.

Change the location of the Bluetooth®

ready device.

The Bluetooth® function of the Blue-tooth® ready device is off.

Refer to the manual of the Bluetooth®

ready device. (Some devices have thepower saving function that automaticallyactivates after a certain time.)

Unable to receive a call. Your current location may be out of ser-vice area.

Drive your vehicle to the service area ofthe phone.

The voice quality of hands-free is low(Distortion, noise etc.).

Another wireless device may be locatednear the unit.

Switch off the wireless device or keep itaway from the unit.

Problem Possible cause Possible solution

5-78


82PH0-74E

Error Display Messages

Display Possible cause Possible solution

CD

ERROR 1CD Error- Data Error & Mount Error (due to scratch)- Unsupported UDF- Open Session Disc

Check the CD

ERROR 2CD Error- Load Fail- Eject Fail

When the CD is in the unit, press the CD eject button toremove the disc.When the disc cannot be ejected, Press the CD eject for4-5 seconds

NO MUSIC There is no playable file on CD Check the CD

USB/iPod®

ERROR 1USB Mount Error- Unsupported File-System- Fail to read file- Fail to read folder

Check the connection of the USB device.

ERROR 2 USB device Error Unplug the USB device and plug it again.Check the USB device.

ERROR 2 and random indicator “USB” is

blinking

When MTP supported device (Smartphone) is connected via USB and if thedevice (Smart phone) is security locked.

Unlock the device (Smart phone)

NO MUSIC There is no playable file on USB & I-pod Check the USB device.

5-79


82PH0-74E

Bluetooth®

Connection Failed Failed to establish pairing Try to establish the pairing again.

NO MUSIC There is no playable file on BT device Check the BT device

Display Possible cause Possible solution

5-80


82PH0-74E

MEMO

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

6

82PH0-74E

54G215

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWINGVehicle Loading ................................................................... 6-1Trailer Towing ...................................................................... 6-1

6-1

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

82PH0-74E

Vehicle LoadingYour vehicle was designed for specificweight capacities. The weight capacities ofyour vehicle are indicated by the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and thePermissible maximum Axle Weight (PAW,front and rear). The GVWR and PAW (frontand rear) are listed in the “SPECIFICA-TIONS” section.GVWR – Maximum permissible overallweight of the fully loaded vehicle (includingall the occupants, accessories and cargoplus the trailer nose weight if towing atrailer).PAW – (Front and Rear) Maximum permis-sible weight on an individual axle.

Actual weight of the loaded vehicle andactual loads at the front and rear axles canonly be determined by weighing the vehi-cle. Compare these weights to the GVWRand PAW (front and rear). If the gross vehi-cle weight or the load on either axleexceeds these ratings, you must removeenough weight to bring the load down tothe rated capacity.

Trailer TowingYour vehicle was originally designed tocarry people and a normal amount ofcargo, not to tow a trailer. MARUTISUZUKI does not recommend that you useyour vehicle to tow a trailer. Towing a trailercan adversely affect handling, durability,and fuel economy.

74LHM06001

WARNINGNever overload your vehicle. Thegross vehicle weight (sum of theweights of the vehicle, all the occu-pants, accessories, cargo plus trailernose weight if towing a trailer) mustnever exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). In addition,never distribute a load so that theweight on either the front or rear axleexceeds the Permissible maximumAxle Weight (PAW).

WARNINGAlways distribute cargo evenly. Toavoid personal injury or damage toyour vehicle, always secure cargo toprevent it from shifting if the vehiclemoves suddenly. Place heavierobjects on the floor and as far for-ward in the cargo area as possible.Never pile cargo higher than the topof the seat backs.

EXAMPLE

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

7

82PH0-74E

60G410

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCEMaintenance Schedule ....................................................... 7-2Periodic Maintenance Schedule ........................................ 7-2Drive Belt ............................................................................. 7-6Engine Oil and Filter ........................................................... 7-6Engine Coolant .................................................................... 7-9Air Cleaner ........................................................................... 7-11Gear Oil ................................................................................ 7-11Clutch Pedal ........................................................................ 7-12Fuel Filter ............................................................................. 7-12Brakes .................................................................................. 7-13Steering ................................................................................ 7-15Tires ...................................................................................... 7-15Battery .................................................................................. 7-18Fuses .................................................................................... 7-19Headlight Aiming.................................................................. 7-22Bulb Replacement ............................................................... 7-22Wiper Blades ....................................................................... 7-30Windshield Washer Fluid ................................................... 7-32Air Conditioning System .................................................... 7-33

7-1


82PH0-74E

60A187S

WARNINGYou should take extreme care whenworking on your vehicle to preventaccidental injury. Here are a few pre-cautions that you should be espe-cially careful to observe:

(Continued)

WARNING(Continued)• To prevent damage or unintended

activation of the air bag system orseat belt pretensioner system, besure the battery is disconnectedand the ignition switch has been inthe “LOCK” position or the ignitionmode has been LOCK (OFF) for atleast 90 seconds before performingany electrical service work on yourMARUTI SUZUKI. Do not touch airbag system components, seat beltpretensioner system componentsor wires. The wires are wrapped with yellowtape or yellow tubing, and the cou-plers are yellow for easy identifica-tion.

• Do not leave the engine running ingarages or other confined areas.

• When the engine is running, keephands, clothing, tools, and otherobjects away from the fan and drivebelt. Even though the fan may notbe moving, it can automaticallyturn on without warning.

(Continued)

WARNING(Continued)• When it is necessary to do service

work with the engine running, makesure that the parking brake is setfully and the transaxle is in Neutral.

• Do not touch ignition wires or otherignition system parts when start-ing the engine or when the engineis running, or you could receive anelectric shock.

• Be careful not to touch a hotengine, exhaust manifold andpipes, muffler, radiator and waterhoses.

• Do not allow smoking, sparks, orflames around fuel or the battery.Flammable fumes are present.

• Do not get under your vehicle if it issupported only with the portablejack provided in your vehicle.

• Be careful not to cause accidentalshort circuits between the positiveand negative battery terminals.

• Keep used oil, coolant, and otherfluids away from children and pets.Dispose of used fluids properly;never pour them on the ground,into sewers, etc.

7-2


82PH0-74E

Maintenance ScheduleThe following table shows the times whenyou should perform regular maintenanceon your vehicle. This table shows in kilo-meters and months when you should per-form inspections, adjustments, lubricationand other services.

Periodic Maintenance Schedule“A” :Adjust“C”: Clean“R”: Replace or Change“I”: Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or

replace as necessary“L”: Lubricate“T”: Tighten to Specified Torque “O”: Rotate

NOTE:This table includes services as scheduledup to 80,000 km mileage. Beyond 80,000km, carry out the same services at thesame intervals respectively.

WARNINGMARUTI SUZUKI recommends thatmaintenance on your vehicle shouldbe performed by authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop Service station.

NOTICEWhenever it becomes necessary toreplace parts on your vehicle, it isrecommended that you use MARUTIgenuine replacement parts or theirequivalent.

7-3


82PH0-74E

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer readingor months, whichever comes first.

FREE INSPECTION PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AT COST

km (x1000) 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

months 1 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

ENGINE1-1 Engine Coolant (Level, Leakage) l l l R l R l R l R

1-2 Engine oil, engine oil filter and drain plug gasket. – – R R R R R R R R

1-3 Cooling system hoses and connections (Leakage and Damage) l l l l l l l l l l

1-4 Engine mounting and manifold fixing (Loose, Damage) – – I – I – I – I –

1-5 Exhaust System (Noise, Leakage etc.) – l – l – I – I – l

1-6 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve – – – – C – – C – –

FUEL2-1. Air cleaner filter element Paved-road Clean after 10,000 KM. Replace after every 40,000 KM.

Dusty Condition Clean after 2,500 KM or as required. Replace after every 40,000 KM.Replace more frequently if dust condition is severe.

2-2. Fuel tank cap, fuel lines and connections (Leakage and Damage) – I – – – I – – – I

2-3. Fuel Filter and Water Draining I I I R I R I R I R

CLUTCH AND TRANSMISSION3-1. Clutch fluid (level, leakage) I I I R I R I R I R

3-2. Clutch slipping (Dragging or Excess Damage) I I I I I I I I I I

3-3. Manual Transmission Oil (Level, Leakage) Replace at 1,60,000 km or 10 years whichever comes first

I I I I I I I I I I

DRIVE SHAFT4-1. Drive shaft boot (Boot damage) – I I I I I I I I I

BRAKE5-1. Brake Fluid (Level, Leakage) I I I R I R I R I R

5-2. Brake pedal (Pedal - floor carpet) I I I I I I I I I I

5-3. Parking brake lever and cable (Play, damage) I I I I I I I I I I

5-4. Brake disc and pad (Wear) – I I I I I I I I I

7-4


82PH0-74E



km (x1000) 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

months 1 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

5-5. Brake drum and shoes (Wear) – – I I I I I I I I

5-6. Master cylinder, wheel cylinder and caliper piston (Fluid leakage, boot/sealdamage) I I I I I I I I I I

5-7. Brake hoses and pipes (Fluid leakage, damage) I I I I I I I I I I

WHEEL6-1. Tyres (air pressure, abnormal wear, crack and rotation) I I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O

6-2. Wheels (Damage) I I I I I I I I I I

6-3. Front/Rear wheel bearing (Loose, damage) I I I I I I I I I I

FRONT / REAR SUSPENSION7-1. Suspension strut (Oil leakage, damage) I I I I I I I I I I

7-2. Suspension arms / Knuckle support (Loose, damage) – I I I I I I I I I

7-3. Rear spring (Damage) I I I I I I I I I I

7-4. Shock absorbers (Oil leakage, damage) I I I I I I I I I I

7-5. All bolts and nuts (Loose) – T T T T T T T T T

7-6. Torsion rods – I I I I I I I I I

STEERING8-1. Steering wheel (Play, loose) I I I I I I I I I I

8-2. Steering column and tie rods (Loose, damage, wear) I I I I I I I I I I

ELECTRICAL9-1. Battery electrolyte (Level, leakage) I I I I I I I I I I

9-2. Wiring harness connection (Loose, damage) – I I I I I I I I I

9-3. Lighting system (Operation, stains, damage) I I I I I I I I I I

9-4. Horn (Operation) I I I I I I I I I I

9-5. System Voltage – I I I I I I I I I

BODY10-1. All chassis bolts and nuts (Tighten) – I T T T T T T T T

10-2. All latches, hinges and locks (Function) I I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L

7-5


82PH0-74E



km (x1000) 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

months 1 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

ROAD TEST11-1. Operation of Brakes, gear shifting and speedometer I I I I I I I I I I

11-2. Body and chassis noise I I I I I I I I I I

AIR CONDITIONER12-1. Check belt tension I I I I I I I I I I

12-2. Tighten compressor mounting bolt – T T T T T T T T T

12-3. All hose joint (Check, tighten) I I I I I I I I I I

12-4. Check functioning of Recirculating flap I I I I I I I I I I

12-5. Clean condenser with low pressure water – C C C C C C C C C

12-6. Check belt for frayed edges I I I I I I I I I I

12-7. Check all mounting bolts I I I I I I I I I I

12-8. Air conditioner filter element I I I I R I I R I I

7-6


82PH0-74E

Drive Belt

Make sure the drive belt tension is correct.If the belt is too loose, insufficient batterycharging, engine overheating, poor powersteering, poor air conditioning, or exces-sive belt wear can result. When you pressthe belt with your thumb midway betweenthe pulleys, there should be a deflectionaccording to the following chart.The belts should also be examined toensure that they are not damaged.If you need to replace or adjust the belthave it done by your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.

For Diesel Engine ModelThe drive belts tension adjusted automati-cally.

Engine Oil and FilterSpecified Oil

79MH0760

(1) Preferred

Be sure that the engine oil you use comesunder the quality classification of ACEAA5/B5. Select the appropriate oil viscosityaccording to the above chart.SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for good fueleconomy, and good starting in coldweather.

Oil Level Check

84E012

(1) MIN(2) MAX(3) Engine oil dipstick

It is important to keep the engine oil at thecorrect level for proper lubrication of yourvehicle’s engine. Check the oil level withthe vehicle on a level surface. The oil levelindication may be inaccurate if the vehicleis on a slope. The oil level should bechecked either before starting the engineor at least 5 minutes after stopping theengine.The handle of the engine oil dipstick iscoloured yellow for easy identification.

WARNINGWhen the engine is running, keephands, hair, clothing, tools, etc. awayfrom the moving fan and drive belts.

CFo

o -30-22

-20-4

-1014 32 50 68 86 104

0 10 20 30 40

(1)

5W-30, 5W-40

(3)

(2) (1)

7-7


82PH0-74E

Pull out the oil dipstick, wipe oil off with aclean cloth, insert the dipstick all the wayinto the engine, then remove it again. Theoil on the stick should be between the MAXand MIN limits shown on the stick. If the oillevel indication is near the lower limit, addenough oil to raise the level to the upperlimit.

Refilling

82PM07001

Remove the oil filler cap and pour oil slowlythrough the filler hole to bring the oil levelto the upper limit on the dipstick. Be carefulnot to overfill. Too much oil is almost asbad as too little oil. After refilling, start theengine and allow it to idle for about a min-ute. Stop the engine, wait about 5 minutesand check the oil level again.

Changing Engine Oil and FilterDrain the engine oil while the engine is stillwarm.

82PM07002

1) Remove the oil filler cap.2) Place a drain pan under the drain plug.3) Using a wrench, remove the drain plug

and drain out the engine oil.

NOTICEFailure to check the oil level regularlycould lead to serious engine troubledue to insufficient oil.

NOTICEDo not top up the oil over the MAXlimit. Too much oil causes seriousengine trouble.

Close

EXAMPLE

Open

CAUTIONThe engine oil temperature may behigh enough to burn your fingerswhen the drain plug is loosened. Waituntil the drain plug is cool enough totouch with your bare hands.

Open Close

EXAMPLE

7-8


82PH0-74E

60G306

Tightening torque for drain plug 20 Nm (2.0 kg-m, 14.8 lb-ft)

4) Reinstall the drain plug with the newgasket. Tighten the plug with a wrenchto the specified torque.

Replace the Oil Filter

NOTE:Since special procedures and tools arerequired, it is recommended that you takeyour vehicle to your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.1) Using a socket or a ring spanner

remove oil filter housing cover (3).

61M7001

(1) Loosen(2) Tighten

2) Remove the old oil filter element andreplace it with a new oil filter element.

3) Clean the surface of oil filter cap andreplace the O-ring.

4) Tighten the oil filter housing cover onthe oil filter housing using a socket orring spanner to the specified torque.

WARNINGNew and used oil can be hazardous.Children and pets may be harmed byswallowing new or used oil. Keepnew and used oil and used oil filtersaway from children and pets.Repeated, prolonged contact withused engine oil may cause skin can-cer.Brief contact with used oil may irri-tate skin.

(Continued)

EXAMPLE WARNING(Continued)To minimize your exposure to usedoil, wear a long-sleeve shirt andmoisture-proof gloves (such as dish-washing gloves) when changing oil. Ifoil contacts your skin, wash thor-oughly with soap and water.Launder any clothing or rags if wetwith oil.Recycle or properly dispose of usedoil and filters.

(1)

(2)(3)

7-9


82PH0-74E

Tightening torque for oil filter25 Nm (2.5 kg-m, 18.5 lb-ft)

Refill with Oil and Check for Leaks1) Pour oil through the filler hole and

install the filler cap. For the approximate capacity of the oil,refer to the “Capacities” item in the“SPECIFICATIONS” section.

2) Start the engine and look carefully forleaks at the oil filter and drain plug. Runthe engine at various speeds for at least5 minutes.

3) Stop the engine and wait about 5 min-utes. Check the oil level again and addoil if necessary. Check for leaks again.

Engine CoolantSelection of CoolantTo maintain optimum performance anddurability of your engine, use MARUTIGenuine Coolant or equivalent.This type of coolant is best for your coolingsystem as it:• Helps maintain proper engine tempera-

ture.• Gives proper protection against freezing

and boiling.• Gives proper protection against corro-

sion and rust.Failure to use the proper coolant can dam-age your cooling system. Your authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop can help youselect the proper coolant.

NOTICETo prevent oil leakage, make surethat the oil filter is tight, but do notover-tighten it.

NOTICE• When replacing the oil filter, it is

recommended that you use a genu-ine MARUTI genuine replacementfilter. If you use an aftermarket fil-ter, make sure it is of equivalentquality and follow the manufac-turer’s instructions.

• Oil leaks from around the oil filteror drain plug indicate incorrectinstallation or gasket damage. Ifyou find any leaks or are not surethat the filter has been properlytightened, have the vehicleinspected by your authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop.

7-10


82PH0-74E

Coolant Level CheckCheck the coolant level at the reservoirtank, not at the radiator. With the enginecool, the coolant level should be betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” marks.

Adding Coolant

61MM0A125

If the coolant level is below the “LOW”mark, more coolant should be added.When the engine is cool, remove thedegassing tank cap by turning it anticlock-wise slowly to release any pressure. Andadd coolant until the degassing tank levelreaches the “FULL” mark. Never fill thedegassing tank above the “FULL” mark.

NOTICETo avoid damaging your cooling sys-tem:• Always use a high quality ethylene

glycol base non-silicate type cool-ant diluted with distilled water atthe correct mixture concentration.

• Make sure that the proper mix is 50/50 coolant to distilled water and inno case higher than 70/30. Concen-trations greater than 70/30 coolantto distilled water will cause over-heating conditions.

• Do not use straight coolant norplain water.

• Do not add extra inhibitors or addi-tives. They may not be compatiblewith your cooling system.

• Do not mix different types of basecoolants. Doing so may result inaccelerated seal wear and/or thepossibility of severe overheatingand extensive engine damage.

WARNINGSwallowing engine coolant can causesevere injury or death. Inhaling cool-ant mist or vapors or getting coolantin your eyes could result in severeinjury.• Do not drink antifreeze or coolant

solution. If swallowed, do notinduce vomiting. Immediately con-tact a poison control center or aphysician.

• Avoid inhaling coolant mist or hotvapors. If inhaled, remove to afresh air area.

• If coolant gets in the eyes, flushwith water and seek medical atten-tion.

• Wash thoroughly after handlingcoolant.

• Keep engine coolant out of thereach of children and pets.

NOTICE• The mixture you use should contain

50% concentration of antifreeze.• If the lowest ambient temperature

in your area is expected to be –35°C(–31°F) or below, use higher con-centrations up to 60% following theinstructions on the antifreeze con-tainer.

WARNINGIt is hazardous to remove the reser-voir tank cap (degassing tank cap) fora diesel engine when the water tem-perature is high, because scaldingfluid and steam may be blown outunder pressure. Wait until the coolanttemperature has lowered beforeremoving the cap.

FULL

LOW

7-11


82PH0-74E

Coolant ReplacementSince special procedures are required, werecommend you take your vehicle to yourauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop forcoolant replacement.

Air CleanerIf the air cleaner is clogged with dust, therewill be greater intake resistance, resultingin decreased power output and increasedfuel consumption.

82PM07003

Unscrew the mounting screws (1) andremove the element from the air cleanercase. If the element appears to be dirtyclean the element or replace it with a newone as per periodic maintenance sched-ule. Ensure proper fitment of gasket afterair cleaning element cleaning or replace-ment.

Tightening torque (1): 3 Nm (0.3 kg-m, 2.2 lb-ft)

Gear OilManual Transaxle OilWhen adding gear oil, use gear oil with theappropriate viscosity and grade as shownin the chart below.

We highly recommend you use:“MARUTI GENUINE GEAR OIL 75W-80”for manual transaxle gear oil.

Manual transaxle oil

68LM728

Gear Oil Level Check

52LM021

(1) Oil filler and level plug

To check the gear oil level, use the follow-ing procedure:1) Park the vehicle on a level surface with

the parking brake applied. Then, stopthe engine.

2) Remove the oil filler and level plug.3) If gear oil flows from the plug hole, the

oil level is correct. Reinstall the plug. Ifgear oil does not flow from the plughole, add oil through the filler plug holeuntil oil flows a little from the plug hole.Tightening torque (1):21 Nm (2.1 kg-m, 15.5 lb-ft)

(1)

(1)

EXAMPLE

CFo

o -30-22

-20-4

-1014 32 50 68 86 104

0 10 20 30 40

75W-80

(1)

EXAMPLE

7-12


82PH0-74E

Gear Oil ChangeSince special procedures, materials andtools are required, it is recommended thatyou trust this job to your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.

Clutch PedalFluid Control Clutch

64MS141

Check the clutch pedal for smooth opera-tion and clutch fluid level from time to time.If clutch dragging is felt with the pedal fullydepressed, have the clutch inspected byyour authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop. Ifthe clutch fluid level is near the “MIN” line,fill it up to the “MAX” line with SAE J1703or Maruti Genuine Brake Fluid (MGBF) orDOT3 brake fluid.

Fuel Filter

82PM07023

The fuel filter works as a water sedimentoras well.Drain water according to the PeriodicMaintenance Schedule. To drain water:1) Place a pan or ample rag under the fuel

filter drain nozzle.2) Loosen the drain knob (1). The water

will be drained.3) Tighten the drain knob (1) when the

water changes to the diesel fuel.4) Tighten the drain knob (1).

Tightening torque for drain knob2.5 Nm (0.25 kg-m, 1.84 lb-ft)

CAUTIONAfter driving the vehicle, the tran-saxle oil temperature may be highenough to burn your skin. Wait untilthe oil filler plug is cool enough totouch with your bare hands beforeinspecting transaxle oil.

NOTICEWhen tightening the plug, apply thefollowing sealing compound orequivalent to the plug threads to pre-vent oil leakage.Manual transaxle sealant:MARUTI SUZUKI Bond No. “1216E”or “1217G”

MAX

MIN (1)

7-13


82PH0-74E

BrakesBrake Fluid

64MS141

Check the brake fluid level by looking atthe reservoir in the engine compartment.Check that the fluid level is between the“MAX” and “MIN” lines. If the brake fluidlevel is near the “MIN” line, fill it up to the“MAX” line with SAE J1703 or Maruti Gen-uine Brake Fluid (MGBF) or DOT3 brakefluid.

NOTE:With disc brakes, the fluid level can beexpected to gradually fall as the brakepads wear.

Brake PedalCheck if the brake pedal stops at the regu-lar height without spongy feeling when youdepress it. If not, have the brake systeminspected by your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop. If you doubt the brakepedal for the regular height, check it as fol-lows:

MAX

MIN

WARNINGFailure to follow the guidelines belowcan result in personal injury or seri-ous damage to the brake system.• If the brake fluid in the reservoir

drops below a certain level, thebrake warning light on the instru-ment panel will come on (theengine must be running with theparking brake fully disengaged).Should the light come on, immedi-ately ask your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop to inspect thebrake system.

• A rapid fluid loss indicates a leak inthe brake system which should beinspected by your authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop immedi-ately.

• Do not use any fluid other than SAEJ1703 or Maruti Genuine BrakeFluid (MGBF) or DOT3 brake fluid.Do not use reclaimed fluid or fluidthat has been stored in old or opencontainers. It is essential that for-eign particles and other liquids arekept out of the brake fluid reservoir.

CAUTIONBrake fluid can harm your eyes anddamage painted surfaces. Use cau-tion when refilling the reservoir.

WARNINGBrake fluid is harmful or fatal if swal-lowed, and harmful if it comes in con-tact with skin or eyes. If swallowed,do not induce vomiting. Immediatelycontact a poison control center or aphysician. If brake fluid gets in eyes,flush eyes with water and seek medi-cal attention. Wash thoroughly afterhandling. Solution can be poisonousto animals. Keep out of the reach ofchildren and animals.

7-14


82PH0-74E

54G108

Pedal to floor carpet minimum dis-tance “a”:58 mm (2.3 in.)

With the engine running, measure the dis-tance between the brake pedal and floorcarpet when the pedal is depressed withapproximately 30 kg (66 lbs) of force. Theminimum distance required is as specified.Since your vehicle’s brake system is self-adjusting, there is no need for pedaladjustment. If the pedal to floor carpet distance asmeasured above is less than the minimumdistance required, have your vehicleinspected by your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.

NOTE:When measuring the distance between thebrake pedal and floor wall, be sure not to

include the floor mat or rubber on the floorwall in your measurement.

60G104S

Parking Brake

54G109

Ratchet tooth specification “b”: 4th – 9thLever pull force (1):200 N (20 kg, 45 lbs)

Check the parking brake for proper adjust-ment by counting the number of clicksmade by the ratchet teeth as you slowlypull up on the parking brake lever to thepoint of full engagement. The parkingbrake lever should stop between the speci-fied ratchet teeth and the rear wheelsshould be securely locked. If the parkingbrake is not properly adjusted or thebrakes drag after the lever has been fullyreleased, have the parking brakeinspected and/or adjusted by your autho-rised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

WARNINGIf you experience any of the followingproblems with your vehicle’s brakesystem, have the vehicle inspectedimmediately by your authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop.• Poor braking performance• Uneven braking (brakes not work-

ing uniformly on all wheels.)• Excessive pedal travel• Brake dragging• Excessive noise• Pedal pulsation (pedal pulsates

when depressed.)

EXAMPLE

(1)

“b”

EXAMPLE

7-15


82PH0-74E

Steering

68LM708

Steering wheel play “c”: 0 – 30 mm (0.0 – 1.2 in.)

Check the play of the steering wheel bygently turning it from left to right and mea-suring the distance that it moves beforeyou feel slight resistance. The play shouldbe between the specified values. Check that the steering wheel turns easilyand smoothly without rattling by turning itall the way to the right and to the left whiledriving very slowly in an open area. If theamount of free play is outside the specifi-cation or you find anything else to bewrong, an inspection must be performedby your authorised Maruti Suzuki work-shop.

Tires

68KH075

The front and rear tire pressure specifica-tions for your vehicle are listed on the TireInformation Label. Both the front and reartires should have the specified tire pres-sure.Note that the value does not apply to thespare tire, if equipped.

Tire InspectionInspect your vehicle’s tires at least once amonth by performing the following checks:1) Measure the air pressure with a tire

gauge. Adjust the pressure if neces-sary. Remember to check the sparetire, too.

82CM09008

“c”

EXAMPLE EXAMPLEWARNING

• Air pressures should be checkedwhen the tires are cold or you mayget inaccurate readings.

• Check the inflation pressure fromtime to time while inflating the tiregradually, until the specified pres-sure is obtained.

• Never under inflate or over inflatethe tires. Under inflation can cause unusualhandling characteristics or cancause the rim to slip on the tirebead, resulting in an accident ordamage to the tire or rim. Over inflation can cause the tire toburst, resulting in personal injury.Over inflation can also causeunusual handling characteristicswhich may result in an accident.

TWI

TWI(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

7-16


82PH0-74E

(1) Tread wear indicator(2) Indicator location mark

2) Check that the depth of the treadgroove is more than 1.6 mm (0.06 in.).To help you check this, the tires havemolded-in tread wear indicators in thegrooves. When the indicators appearon the tread surface, the remainingdepth of the tread is 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)or less and the tire should be replaced.

3) Check for abnormal wear, cracks anddamage. Any tires with cracks or otherdamage should be replaced. If any tiresshow abnormal wear, have theminspected by your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.

4) Check for loose wheel nuts.5) Check that there are no nails, stones or

other objects sticking into the tires.

Tire Rotation5-tire rotation

80JK040

If your vehicle is equipped with a spare tirewhich is a different wheel type than thewheels on the vehicle, you must use a 4-tire rotation as shown in the examplebelow.

4-tire rotation

54G114

CAUTIONHitting curbs and running over rockscan damage tires and affect wheelalignment. Be sure to have tires andwheel alignment checked periodi-cally by your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.

WARNING• Your MARUTI SUZUKI is equipped

with tires which are all the sametype and size. This is important toensure proper steering and han-dling of the vehicle. Never mix tiresof different size or type on the fourwheels of your vehicle. The sizeand type of tires used should beonly those approved by MARUTISUZUKI as standard or optionalequipment for your vehicle.

• Replacing the wheels and tiresequipped on your vehicle with cer-tain combinations of aftermarketwheels and tires can significantlychange the steering and handlingcharacteristics of your vehicle.

• Therefore, use only those wheeland tire combinations approved byMARUTI SUZUKI as standard oroptional equipment for your vehi-cle.

NOTICEReplacing the original tires with tiresof a different size may result in falsespeedometer or odometer readings.Check with your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop before purchasingreplacement tires that differ in sizefrom the original tires.

7-17


82PH0-74E

To avoid uneven wear of your tires and toprolong their life, rotate the tires as illus-trated. Tires should be rotated every 10000km. After rotation, adjust front and rear tirepressures to the specification listed onyour vehicle’s Tire Information Label.Wheel BalancingIf the vehicle vibrates abnormally onsmooth road, have the wheel balanced atauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.Wheel AlignmentIn case of abnormal tire wear or pullingtowards one side, have the wheel alignedat authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

Tubeless TiresThe vehicle is equipped with TubelessTyres. In tubeless tire, a thin layer of butylrubber is used for lining the inside of thetubeless tire. This layer is to prevent airloss and fulfilling the purpose of tube. Theair pressure is maintained by the sealingbetween tire bead and wheel rim. Tubelesstires are having advantage of slow air lossand preventing sudden deflation while driv-ing.Care and maintenance tips for tubelesstires1) Always maintain recommended infla-

tion pressure. Driving continuously atlow inflation pressure can lead to tyredamage.

2) In case any leakage is found, check forany nail penetration/valve core damage

or rim bent. Damaged wheel must notbe used.

3) In case tire has run at low pressure, itmust be inspected for any defect.

4) Whenever new tire is fitted, replace thevalve.

5) If continuous high speed driving isrequired, increase tires pressure by 5psi over recommended inflation pres-sure.

6) Never run the tire beyond TWI (Treadwear indicator). The tire is recommen-ded to be replaced when the remainingtread has worn to this point. The indica-tors are spaced across the tread aroundthe tire marked by a triangular symbol(TWI).

7) Always prefer tubeless tire mountingmachine. In case of manual mounting-tire/wheel rim damage may occur.

8) In case of any problem, please get intouch with authorised MARUTI SUZUKIworkshop.

Temporary Spare Tire (if equipped)Your vehicle comes equipped with the tem-porary spare tire. It is only intended for tem-porary emergency use, until theconventional tire can be repaired orreplaced. The inflation pressure of the tem-porary spare tire should be checked at leastmonthly. At the same time, check that thetire is stored securely. If it is not, tighten it.Note that two or more temporary spare tiresshould not be used on one vehicle simulta-neously.

WARNINGThe temporary spare tire and wheelare intended for temporary emergencyuse only. Continuous use of this sparecan result in tire failure and loss ofcontrol. Always observe these precau-tions when using this spare:• Your vehicle will handle differently

with this temporary spare.• Do not exceed 120 km/h (75 mph)

speed (only vehicle with 215/60R1695H tire).

• Replace this spare with a standardtire and wheel as soon as possible.

• Use of this spare may reduceground clearance.

• Set the specified tire pressure indi-cated on the tire information labellocated on the driver’s door lockpillar.

• Do not use tire chains on the tem-porary spare. If you must use tirechains, rearrange the wheels sostandard tires and wheels are fittedto the front axle.

• The temporary spare tire may haveshorter tread life than the conven-tional tires on your vehicle.Replace the tire as soon as thetread wear indicator appears.

• When replacing the temporaryspare tire, use a replacement tirewith the exact same size and con-struction.

7-18


82PH0-74E

Battery

54GM701

The level of the battery solution must bekept between the “MAX” and the “MIN”level lines at all times. If the level is foundto be below the “MIN” level line, add dis-tilled water to the “MAX” level line. Youshould periodically check the battery, bat-tery terminals, and battery hold-downbracket for corrosion. Remove corrosionusing a stiff brush and ammonia mixedwith water, or baking soda mixed withwater. After removing corrosion, rinse withclean water.If your vehicle is not going to be driven fora month or longer, disconnect the cablefrom the negative terminal of the battery tohelp prevent discharge.

68PH00720

To remove the battery:1) Disconnect the negative cable (1).2) Disconnect the positive cable (2).3) Remove the retainer nuts (3) and

remove retainer (4).4) Remove the bracket bolt (5) and

remove the bracket (6).5) Remove the battery.

To install the battery:1) Install the battery in the reverse order of

removal.2) Tighten the bracket bolt, retainer nutsa

and battery cables securely.

NOTE:When the battery is disconnected, some ofthe vehicle’s function will be initialized and/or deactivated.These function are required to reset afterthe battery is reconnected.

WARNING• Batteries produce flammable

hydrogen gas. Keep flames andsparks away from the battery or anexplosion may occur. Never smokewhen working in the vicinity of thebattery.

• When checking or servicing thebattery, disconnect the negativecable. Be careful not to cause ashort circuit by allowing metalobjects to contact the battery postsand the vehicle at the same time.

• To avoid harm to yourself or dam-age to your vehicle or battery, fol-low the jump starting instructionsin the “EMERGENCY SERVICE”section of this manual if it is neces-sary to jump start your vehicle.

• Diluted sulfuric acid spilled frombattery can cause blindness orsevere burns. Use proper eye pro-tection and gloves. Flush eyes orbody with ample water and getmedical care immediately if suf-fered. Keep batteries out of thereach of children.

EXAMPLE(1)

(2)

(3)

(6)

(4)

(5)

EXAMPLE

7-19


82PH0-74E

FusesYour vehicle has three types of fuses, asdescribed below:Main fuseThe main fuse takes current directly fromthe battery.Primary fusesThese fuses are between the main fuseand individual fuses, and are for electricalload groups.Individual fusesThese fuses are for individual electrical cir-cuits.

To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller pro-vided in the back of fuse box cover.

82PM07028

Fuses in the Engine Compartment

61MM0B068

82PH065

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)(9)

(10)(11)(12)(13)

(14)(15)(16)(17)

(18)

(30)(31)(32)(33)(34)(35)(36)

(19)

(21)

(20)

(22)(23)(24)

(26)(25)

(27)

(28)

(29)

MAIN FUSE/PRIMARY FUSE(1) 60A FL7(2) 80A FL6(3) 100A FL5(4) 80A FL4(5) 100A FL3(6) 100A FL2(7) 120A FL1(8) 50A Ignition switch -2(9) 7.5A ECM

(10) 10A Air compressor(11) 30A FI(12) 20A Fuel pump(13) 30A Back up(14) – Blank(15) – Blank(16) 40A Radiator fan(17) – Blank(18) 30A Blower fan(19) 30A Starting motor(20) 40A ABS motor(21) 10A Stop light(22) – Blank(23) 25A Head light main(24) 25A ABS control module

7-20


82PH0-74E

The main fuse, primary fuses and some ofthe individual fuses are located in theengine compartment. If the main fuseblows, no electrical component will func-tion. If a primary fuse blows, no electricalcomponent in the corresponding loadgroup will function. When replacing themain fuse, a primary fuse or an individualfuse, use a Maruti Genuine Part.To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller pro-vided in the back of fuse box cover. Theamperage of each fuse is shown in theback of the fuse box cover.

60G111

NOTE:Make sure that the fuse box always carriesspare fuses and fuse puller.

Fuses under the Dash Board

64MS153

64MS112

NOTE:To approach the fuses, remove the clips(1) by prying it off with a flat blade screw-driver as shown in the illustration, thenremove the cover (2).

(25) 15A Head light low (Left)(26) 15A Head light low (Right)(27) 10A Front fog light(28) 40A Ignition switch(29) 7.5A Starting Signal(30) – Blank(31) – Blank(32) 15A Head light high (Right)(33) 15A Head light high (Left)(34) 20A INJ DRV(35) 10A FI2(36) – Blank WARNING

If the main fuse or a primary fuseblows, be sure to have your vehicleinspected by an authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop. Always use aMaruti Genuine Part. Never use asubstitute such as a wire even for atemporary repair, or extensive electri-cal damage and a fire can result.

EXAMPLE

BLOWN

OK

EXAMPLE

(1)(2)(1)

7-21


82PH0-74E

Type A

68LM701

Type B

82PM07024

PRIMARY FUSE(1) – Blank

(2) 20 A Power window timer

(3) 15 A Steering lock

(4) 20 A Rear defogger

(5) 20 A Sunroof

(6) 10 A DRL

(7) 10 A Heated mirror

(8) 7.5 A Starting signal

(9) 15 A Accessory socket 2

(10) 30 A Power window

(11) 10 A Hazard

(1)

(12)(10)

(13)

(36)

(2) (3) (4)

(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

(11) (14) (15)

(16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22)

(23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29)

(30) (31) (32) (33) (34) (35)

(12) 7.5 A BCM

(13) 15 A Ignition coil

(14) 10 A ABS control module

(15) 15 A Accessory socket

(16) 10 A A-STOP controller

(17) 15 A Horn

(18) 10 A Stop light

(19) 10 A Air bag

(20) 10 A Back-up light

(21) 15 A Wiper / Washer

(22) 30 A Front wiper

(23) 10 A Dome light

(24) 15 A 4WD

(25) 7.5 A RR fog lamp

(26) – Blank

(27) 7.5 A Ignition-1 signal

(28) 15 A Radio 2

(29) 10 A Accessory socket 3

(30) 15 A Radio

(31) 10 A Tail lamp

(32) 20 A D/L

(33) 7.5 A Cruise control

(34) 10 A Meter

(35) 7.5 A Ignition-2 signal

(36) 20 A Seat heater

PRIMARY FUSE(1) 15A ACC-2

(2) 15A ACC-1

(3) 10A Tail lamp

(4) 15A Horn

(5) 10A Dome light

(6) 15A Radio

(7) 10A ABS

(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)

(8)(9)

(10)(11)(12)(13)

(15)(7) (14)

(16)(17)(18)(19)(20)

7-22


82PH0-74E

81A283

Headlight AimingSince special procedures are required, werecommend you take your vehicle to yourauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop forheadlight alignment.

Bulb Replacement(8) 20A Power window timer

(9) 10A Hazard

(10) 20A D/L

(11) 7.5A Ignition-2 signal

(12) 30A Front wiper

(13) 15A Wiper

(14) 7.5A Starting Signal

(15) 15A Ignition coil

(16) 10A Meter

(17) 10A Back-up light

(18) 10A Air bag

(19) 7.5A Cruise control

(20) 7.5A Ignition signal

BLO WNOK

WARNINGAlways be sure to replace a blownfuse with a fuse of the correct amper-age. Never use a substitute such asaluminum foil or wire to replace ablown fuse. If you replace a fuse andthe new one blows in a short periodof time, you may have a major electri-cal problem. Have your vehicleinspected immediately by yourauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

CAUTION• Light bulbs can be hot enough to

burn your finger right after beingturned off. This is true especiallyfor halogen headlight bulbs.Replace the bulbs after theybecome cool enough.

• The headlight bulbs are filled withpressurized halogen gas. They canburst and injure you if they are hitor dropped. Handle them carefully.

• To avoid injury by sharp-edgedparts of the body, wear gloves anda long-sleeved shirt when replacinglight bulbs.

NOTICEThe oils from your skin may cause ahalogen bulb to overheat and burstwhen the lights are on. Grasp a newbulb with a clean cloth.

NOTICEFrequent replacement of a bulb indi-cates the need for an inspection ofthe electrical system. This should becarried out by your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.

7-23


82PH0-74E

HeadlightsHigh beam(1)

82PM07008

82PM07006

1) Open the engine hood.Remove thesealing rubber (3) and disconnect thecoupler (2).

82PM07009

2) Push the retaining spring (4) forwardand unhook it. Then remove the bulb(5). Install a new bulb in the reverseorder of removal.

Low Beam(1)Type A

82PH067

82PM07004

1) Open the engine hood.Remove sealingrubber (3) and pull put the coupleralong with the bulb (2).

2) Install the new bulb in reverse order ofthe removal.

(1)

EXAMPLE

(3)(2)

(5)(4)

(1)

(3)(2)

EXAMPLE

7-24


82PH0-74E

NOTE:• When installing the bulb make sure the

lug (4) is facing upwards.Ensure that thebulb is properly aligned in bulb housingand push.A click sound confirms theproper locking.

• To easily locate/align the bulb, look atthe hole from the lamp front.

82PM07005

Type B

82PH068

82PM07006

1) Open the engine hood.Remove thesealing rubber (3) and disconnect thecoupler (2).

82PM07007

2) Push the retaining spring (4) forwardand unhook it. Then remove the bulb(5). Install a new bulb in the reverseorder of removal.

Side Turn Signal Light (if equipped)

76MH0A006

(4)EXAMPLE

(1)

EXAMPLE

(3)(2)

(4)(5)

(1)

7-25


82PH0-74E

1) Remove the light housing (1) by slidingto left with your finger.

76MH0A007

2) Turn the bulb holder (2) clockwise andpull it out from the light housing.

76MH0A008

(4) Removal(5) Install

3) To remove and install the bulb of theturn signal light (3), simply pull out orpush in the bulb.

Front Position Light (1)Type A

82PM07025

68PH00732

1) Open the engine hood and removesealing rubber. To remove the bulbholder of the front position light(1) from

the light housing, turn the holder coun-terclockwise and pull it out.

82PM07026

(2) Removal(3) Installation

2) To remove and install the bulb of thefront position light (1), simply pull out orpush in the bulb.

Type B

82PM07027

Position function in type B headlamp isLED type which is non replaceable.

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

EXAMPLE

(1)

EXAMPLE

(1)

(2)

(3)

EXAMPLE

(1)

7-26


82PH0-74E

Front Turn Signal Light

82PM07010

82PM07011

1) Open the engine hood and disconnectthe connector. To remove the bulbholder of the front turn signal light (1)

from the light housing, turn the holdercounterclockwise and pull it out.

82PM07012

(3) Removal(4) Install

2) To remove the bulb of the front turn sig-nal light (2) from the bulb holder, pushin the bulb and turn it counterclockwise.To install a new bulb, push it in and turnit clockwise.

Front Fog Light (if equipped)1) Start the engine. Turn the steering

wheel to the opposite side of the replac-ing fog light to replace the bulb easily.Then turn off the engine.

82PM07029

2) Remove all the clips (1) and screws (2)used in fender mounting by prying it offand unscrewing with the help of screw-driver as shown in the illustration.

(1)

EXAMPLE

(2)

(3)

(4)

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

7-27


82PH0-74E

76MH0A120

3) Open the end of the cover inside thefender.

82PM07013

4) Disconnect the coupler (2) by pushingthe lock release. Press the top and bot-tom lock release simultaneously andpull to remove the bulb (3). Install a newbulb in the reverse order of removal.

Rear Combination Light

82PM07014

1) Remove the bolts (1) and pull the lighthousing (2) straight.

82PM07015

2) To remove the bulb holder of the brake/position light (3) and turn signal light (4)from the light housing, turn the holdercounterclockwise and pull it out.

82PM07016

(5) Removal(6) Install3) To remove the bulb of the brake/posi-

tion light (3) and the turn signal light (4)from bulb holder, push the bulb and turnit counterclockwise. To install a newbulb, push it in and turn it clockwise.

82PM07017

EXAMPLE

(2)

(3)

EXAMPLE

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(3) / (4)(5)

(6)

EXAMPLE

(7)

7-28


82PH0-74E

NOTE:• When reinstalling the light housing,

make sure the clips (7) are properlyattached.

• If your vehicle is equipped with LEDposition lights, light (3) will behave asstop light only.

Reversing Light

82PM07018

Open the trunk lid and remove the backdoor trim. Disconnect the coupler (1) bypushing the lock release. Turn the bulbholder (2) counterclockwise and removeit.Pull the bulb to remove. To install a newbulb, push it in and turn the bulb holder inclockwise.

Rear Position Light -Back door (if equipped)

82PM07018

Open the trunk lid and remove the backdoor trim. Disconnect the coupler (1) bypushing the lock release. Turn the bulbholder (2) counterclockwise and removeit.Pull the bulb to remove.To install a new bulb, push it in and turn it clockwise.

License Plate Light

68PH00742

1) Turn the cover (1) counterclockwise toremove it.

68PH00743

2) To remove and install the bulb of thelicense plate light (2), simply pull out orpush in the bulb.

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

7-29


82PH0-74E

Interior LightFront

82PM07020

1) Open the stowing box and remove thebolt.Pull out the spot light assemblyfrom the front dome while releasing thelocks.

2) Disconnect the connector from the spotlight.

82PM07021

3) Rotate and remove the spot light bulb(1) from the socket.Install a new bulb inthe reverse order of removal.

Rear

60G115

Remove the lens by using a flat bladescrewdriver covered with a soft cloth asshown. To install it, simply push it back in.Luggage compartment (if equipped)

61MM0B072

Glove Box Light (if equipped)Since special procedures are required, werecommend you take your vehicle to yourauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop forbulb replacement.

61M0108

1) Press inward on both side of the glovebox to unclamp it.

64MS096

2) To remove and install the bulb of theglove box light (2), simply pull out orpush in the bulb.

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

7-30


82PH0-74E

Wiper Blades

54G129

If the wiper blades become brittle or dam-aged, or make streaks when wiping,replace the wiper blades.To install new wiper blades, follow the pro-cedures below.

NOTE:Some wiper blades may be different fromthe ones described here depending onvehicle specifications. If so, consult yourauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop forproper replacement method.

For windshield wipers:

70G119

1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-dow.

NOTE:When raising both of the front wiper arms,pull the driver’s side wiper arm up first.When returning the wiper arms, lower thepassenger’s side wiper arm first.Otherwise, the wiper arms may interferewith each other which would result in dam-age of wiper blade.

54G130

2) Squeeze lock (1) towards wiper arm (2)and remove the wiper frame from thearm as shown.

3) Unlock the lock end of the wiper bladeand slide the blade out as shown.

NOTICETo avoid scratching or breaking thewindow, do not let the wiper armstrike the window while replacing thewiper blade.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

7-31


82PH0-74E

Removal

60A260

Installation

54G132

(1) Locked end

68PH00754

(3) Retainer

4) If the new blade is provided without thetwo metal retainers, move them fromthe old blade to the new one.

68PH00753

60MH072

(A) Up(B) Down

NOTE:When you install the metal retainers (3),make sure the direction of metal retainersas shown in the above illustrations.

5) Install the new blade in the reverseorder of removal, with the locked endpositioned toward the wiper arm. Make sure the blade is properlyretained by all the hooks. Lock theblade end into place.

6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm, makingsure that the lock lever is snappedsecurely into the arm.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

(3)

(3)

EXAMPLE

(3)

(3)

EXAMPLE

(3)

(A)

(B)

EXAMPLE

7-32


82PH0-74E

For rear wipers:

80G146

1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-dow.

2) Remove the wiper frame from the armas shown.

3) Slide the blade out as shown.

65D151

NOTE:Do not flex the wiper blade frame endmore than necessary. If you do, it canbreak off.

54G135

(1) Retainer

4) If the new blade is provided without thetwo metal retainers, move them fromthe old blade to the new one.

5) Install the new blade in the reverseorder of removal. Make sure the blade is properlyretained by all the hooks.

6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm in thereverse order of removal.

Windshield Washer Fluid

82PM07022

Visually inspect that there is washer fluid inthe tank. Refill it if necessary. Use a goodquality windshield washer fluid, diluted withwater as necessary.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

(1)

(1)

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

7-33


82PH0-74E

Air Conditioning SystemIf you do not use the air conditioner for along period, such as during winter, it maynot give the best performance when youstart using it again. To help maintain opti-mum performance and durability of your airconditioner, it needs to be run periodically.Operate the air conditioner at least once amonth for one minute with the engineidling. This circulates the refrigerant and oiland helps protect the internal components.

Replacement of the Air Conditioner Filter (if equipped)

Since special procedures are required, werecommend you take your vehicle to yourauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for theair conditioner filter replacement.

68PH00757

1) To approach the air conditioner filter,press inward on both sides of the glovebox, pull it frontward and remove it.

68PH00758

2) Remove the cover (1) and pull out theair conditioner filter (2).

NOTE:When you install a new filter, make surethe UP mark (3) faces upward.

WARNINGDo not use radiator antifreeze in thewindshield washer reservoir. Thiscan severely impair visibility whensprayed on the windshield, and canalso damage your vehicle’s paint.

NOTICEDamage may result if the washermotor is operated with no fluid in thewasher tank.

EXAMPLE

(1)

(2)

(3)

EMERGENCY SERVICE

8

82PH0-74E

60G411

EMERGENCY SERVICETire Changing Tool ............................................................. 8-1Jacking Instructions ........................................................... 8-2Jump Starting Instructions ................................................ 8-5Towing .................................................................................. 8-6If the Starter Does Not Operate .......................................... 8-7If the Engine is Flooded ...................................................... 8-7If the Engine Overheats ...................................................... 8-8Warning Triangle.................................................................. 8-9

8-1

EMERGENCY SERVICE

82PH0-74E

Tire Changing Tool

82PM08001

(1) Spare tire(2) Jack(3) Jack handle(4) Wheel Brace(5) Luggage Compartment Board(6) Luggage Compartment Tray (if equipped)

The tire changing tools are stowed in the luggage compartment below the luggage com-partment board.Pull the thread of the luggage compartment board upwards.It can be held open as shownin the above illustration, if the vehicle is equipped with luggage compartment board.

EXAMPLE

(1) (2) (3) (4)

(5)

(6)

82PM08004

To remove the jack, hold the tire changingtool storage with one hand while pullingthe jack from the centre as shown in theabove illustration.

WARNINGAfter using the tire changing tools, besure to stow them securely or theycan cause injury if an accidentoccurs.

CAUTIONThe jack should be used only tochange wheels. It is important to readthe jacking instructions in this sec-tion before attempting to use thejack.

8-2

EMERGENCY SERVICE

82PH0-74E

64MS142

To remove the spare tire, turn its holderbolt (1) counterclockwise and remove it.While replacing alloy wheel make sure toremove the wheel cap before keeping thetire in the trunk.

Jacking Instructions1) Place the vehicle on level, hard ground.2) Set the parking brake firmly and shift

into “R” (Reverse).

3) Turn on the hazard warning flasher ifyour vehicle is near traffic.

52KM119

4) Block the front and rear of the wheeldiagonally opposite of the wheel beinglifted.

5) Place the spare wheel near the wheelbeing lifted as shown in the illustrationin case that the jack slips.

54G253

63J100

63J101

NOTICEBe sure that spare tire does not moveafter tightening the holder bolt

(1)

WARNING• Be sure to shift into “R” (Reverse)

when you jack up the vehicle.• Never jack up the vehicle with the

transaxle in “N” (Neutral). Other-wise, unstable jack may cause anaccident.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

8-3

EMERGENCY SERVICE

82PH0-74E

6) Position the jack vertically and raise thejack by turning the jack handle clock-wise until the jack head groove fitsaround the jacking bar beneath thevehicle body.

7) Continue to raise the jack slowly andsmoothly until the tire clears theground. Do not raise the vehicle morethan necessary.

To Raise the Vehicle with a Garage Jack• Apply the garage jack to one of the

points indicated below.• Always support the raised vehicle with

jack stands (commercially available) atthe points indicated below.

Front jacking point for garage jack (1)

82PM08003

Rear jacking point for garage jack (2)

64MS140

Application point for jack stand (3) or two-column lift

61MM0B103

WARNING• Use the jack only to change wheels

on level, hard ground.• Never jack up the vehicle on an

inclined surface.• Never raise the vehicle with the

jack in a location other than thespecified jacking point (shown inthe illustration) near the wheel tobe changed.

• Make sure that the jack is raised atleast 51 mm (2 inches) before itcontacts the flange. Use of the jackwhen it is within 51 mm (2 inches)of being fully collapsed may resultin failure of the jack.

• Never get under the vehicle when itis supported by the jack.

• Never run the engine when thevehicle is supported by the jackand never allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

(1)

EXAMPLE

(2)

EXAMPLE

(3) (3)

EXAMPLE

8-4

EMERGENCY SERVICE

82PH0-74E

NOTE:For more details, please contact an autho-rised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

Changing WheelsTo change a wheel, use the following pro-cedure:1) Remove the jack, tools and spare

wheel from the vehicle.2) Loosen, but do not remove the wheel

nut.3) Jack up the vehicle (follow the jacking

instructions in this section).

4) Remove the wheel nuts and wheel.

65J4033

5) Before installing the new wheel, cleanany mud or dirt off from the surface ofthe wheel (1), hub (2), thread part (3)and surface of the wheel nuts (4) with aclean cloth. Clean the hub carefully; itmay be hot from driving.

6) Install the new wheel and replace thewheel nuts with their cone shaped endfacing the wheel. Tighten each nutsnugly by hand until the wheel issecurely seated on the hub.

81A057

Tightening torque for wheel nut100 Nm (10.2 kg-m, 73.8 lb-ft)

7) Lower the jack and fully tighten the nutsin a crisscross fashion with a wrench asshown in the illustration.

NOTICENever apply a garage jack to theexhaust pipe, side under spoiler (ifequipped), engine undercover or reartorsion beam.

WARNING• Be sure to shift into “R” (Reverse)

when you jack up the vehicle.• Never jack up the vehicle with the

transaxle in “N” (Neutral). Other-wise, unstable jack may cause anaccident.

(2)

(4)

(1)

(3)

WARNINGUse genuine wheel nuts and tightenthem to the specified torque as soonas possible after changing wheels.Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts may comeloose or fall off, which can result inan accident. If you do not have atorque wrench, have the wheel nuttorque checked by an authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop.

8-5

EMERGENCY SERVICE

82PH0-74E

Full Wheel Cover (if equipped)

60G309

Insert a piece of cloth between the spokesof the wheel cover and try to pull the coveroutward (as shown in figure). Take out thedetached wheel cover from the wheel rim.For installation first match the slot at thewheel cover with the air filling nozzle of thewheel. Apply equal pressure at the circum-ference of the wheel cover to fix it in thewheel rim.

54G117

When installing the cover, make sure that itis positioned so that it does not cover orfoul the air valve.

Jump Starting Instructions

When Jump Starting Your Vehicle, Use the Following Procedure:1) Use only a 12-volt battery to jump start

your vehicle. Position the good 12-voltbattery close to your vehicle so that thejump leads will reach both batteries.When using a battery installed onanother vehicle, DO NOT LET THEVEHICLES TOUCH. Set the parkingbrakes fully on both vehicles.

2) Turn off all vehicle accessories, exceptthose necessary for safety reasons (forexample, headlights or hazard lights).

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

WARNING• Never attempt to jump start your

vehicle if the battery appears to befrozen. Batteries in this conditionmay explode or rupture if jumpstarting is attempted.

• When making jump lead connec-tions, be certain that your handsand the jump leads remain clearfrom pulleys, belts, or fans.

• Batteries produce flammablehydrogen gas. Keep flames andsparks away from the battery or anexplosion may occur. Never smokewhen working in the vicinity of thebattery.

• If the booster battery you use forjump starting is installed in anothervehicle, make sure the two vehiclesare not touching each other.

• If your battery discharges repeat-edly, for no apparent reason, haveyour vehicle inspected by anauthorised Maruti Suzuki work-shop.

• To avoid harm to yourself or dam-age to your vehicle or battery, fol-low the jump starting instructionsbelow precisely and in order. If you are in doubt, call for qualifiedroad service.

NOTICEYour vehicle should not be started bypushing or towing. This startingmethod could result in permanentdamage to the catalytic converter.Use jump leads to start a vehicle witha weak or flat battery.

8-6

EMERGENCY SERVICE

82PH0-74E

82PM08002

3) Make jump lead connections as follows:1. Connect one end of the first jump

lead to the positive (+) terminal ofthe flat battery (a).

2. Connect the other end to the positive(+) terminal of the booster battery(b).

3. Connect one end of the second jumplead to the negative (–) terminal ofthe booster battery (b).

4. Make the final connection to anunpainted, heavy metal part (i.e.engine mount bracket (c)) of theengine of the vehicle with the flatbattery (a).

4) If the booster battery you are using isfitted to another vehicle, start theengine of the vehicle with the boosterbattery. Run the engine at moderatespeed.

5) Start the engine of the vehicle with theflat battery.

6) Remove the jump leads in the exactreverse order in which you connectedthem.

TowingIf you need to have your vehicle towed,contact a professional service. Your dealercan provide you with detailed towinginstructions.

2-Wheel Drive (2WD) Manual Tran-saxleManual transaxle vehicles may be towedusing either of the following methods.1) From the front, with the front wheels

lifted and the rear wheels on theground. Before towing, make sure thatthe parking brake is released.

2) From the rear, with the rear wheelslifted and the front wheels on theground, provided the steering anddrivetrain are in operational condition.Before towing, make sure that transaxleis in neutral, the steering wheel isunlocked (vehicle without keyless pushstart system - the ignition key should bein the “ACC” position) (vehicle with key-less push start system - the ignitionmode is ACC), and the steering wheelis secured with a clamping devicedesigned for towing service.

(b)

(a)

(c)

1

23

4

EXAMPLE

WARNINGNever connect the jump lead directlyto the negative (–) terminal of the dis-charged battery, or an explosion mayoccur.

CAUTIONConnect the jump lead to the enginemount bracket securely. If the jumplead disconnects from the enginemount bracket because of vibrationat the start of the engine, the jumplead could be caught in the drivebelts.

NOTICETo help avoid damage to your vehicleduring towing, proper equipment andtowing procedures must be used.

8-7

EMERGENCY SERVICE

82PH0-74E

If the Starter Does Not Operate1) Try turning the ignition switch to the

“START” position or try pressing theengine switch to change the ignitionmode to START with the headlightsturned on to determine the battery con-dition. If the headlights go excessivelydim or go off, it usually means thateither the battery is flat or the batteryterminal contact is poor. Recharge thebattery or correct battery terminal con-tact as necessary.

2) If the headlights remain bright, checkthe fuses. If the reason for failure of thestarter is not obvious, there may be amajor electrical problem. Have the vehi-cle inspected by your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.

If the Engine is FloodedIf the engine is flooded with fuel, it may behard to start. If this happens, press theaccelerator pedal all the way to the floorand hold it there while cranking the engine.Do not operate the starter motor for morethan 30 seconds.

NOTE:For keyless push start, if the enginerefuses to start, the starter motor automati-cally stops after a certain period of time.After the starter motor has automaticallystopped or there is anything abnormal inthe engine starting system, the startermotor runs only while the engine switch isheld pressed.

NOTICEThe steering column is not strongenough to withstand shocks trans-mitted from the front wheels duringtowing. Always unlock the steeringwheel before towing.

8-8

EMERGENCY SERVICE

82PH0-74E

If the Engine OverheatsThe engine could overheat temporarilyunder severe driving conditions. If the highengine coolant temperature warning lightcomes on as overheating and/or theengine coolant temperature gauge indi-cates overheating during driving:1) Turn off the air conditioner, if equipped.2) Take the vehicle to a safe place and

park.3) Let the engine run at the normal idle

speed for a few minutes until the highengine coolant temperature warninglight goes off and the indicator is withinthe normal, acceptable temperaturerange between “H” and “C”.

If the high engine coolant temperaturewarning light does not go off or the tem-perature indication does not come down towithin the normal, acceptable range:1) Turn off the engine and check that the

water pump belt and pulleys are notdamaged or slipping. If any abnormalityis found, correct it.

2) Check the coolant level in the reservoir.If it is found to be lower than the “LOW”line, look for leaks at the radiator, waterpump, and radiator and heater hoses. Ifyou locate any leaks that may havecaused the overheating, do not run theengine until these problems have beencorrected.

3) If you do not find a leak, carefully addcoolant to the reservoir and then theradiator, if necessary. (Refer to “EngineCoolant” in the “INSPECTION ANDMAINTENANCE” section.)

NOTE:If your engine overheats and you areunsure what to do, contact your authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop.

65D350D

WARNINGIf you see or hear escaping steam,stop the vehicle in a safe place andimmediately turn off the engine to letit cool. Do not open the hood whensteam is present. When the steamcan no longer be seen or heard, openthe hood to see if the coolant is stillboiling. If it is, you must wait until itstops boiling before you proceed.

WARNING• It is hazardous to remove the

degassing tank cap for a dieselengine when the water temperatureis high, because scalding fluid andsteam may be blown out underpressure. The cap should only betaken off when the coolant tem-perature has lowered.

• To help prevent personal injury,keep hands, tools and clothingaway from the engine cooling fanand air-conditioner fan (ifequipped). These electric fans canautomatically turn on without warn-ing.

EXAMPLE

8-9

EMERGENCY SERVICE

82PH0-74E

Warning Triangle

MHO-07-001

In case of vehicle break-down or duringemergency stopping, where, your vehiclecould become a potential traffic hazard,keep the warning triangle, provided withyour vehicle, on the road free from anyobstacles behind your vehicle so as towarn the approaching traffic, at an approxi-mate distance of 50-100 m. The reflectingside of the triangle should face the on com-ing traffic. Please activate the hazardwarning lamps before alighting the vehicleto keep the warning triangle.

MHO-07-014

• Remove the warning triangle carefullyfrom the cover as shown by arrow 1.

• Open both the reflector arms as shownby arrow and lock the arms with eachother with the clip provided in the rightarm. Open the bottom stand in counterclock-wise direction as shown by arrow3. Position the warning triangle behindthe vehicle on a plain surface.

• Reverse the removal procedure forkeeping inside the cover.

MHO-07-015

EXAMPLE

8-10

EMERGENCY SERVICE

82PH0-74E

MEMO

APPEARANCE CARE

9

82PH0-74E

60G412

APPEARANCE CARECorrosion Prevention ......................................................... 9-1Vehicle Cleaning ................................................................. 9-2

9-1

APPEARANCE CARE

82PH0-74E

Corrosion PreventionIt is important to take good care of yourvehicle to protect it from corrosion. Listedbelow are instructions for how to maintainyour vehicle to prevent corrosion. Pleaseread and follow these instructions carefully.

Important Information About CorrosionCommon causes of corrosion1) Accumulation of road salt, dirt, mois-

ture, or chemicals in hard-to-reachareas of the vehicle underbody orframe.

2) Chipping, scratches and any damage totreated or painted metal surfacesresulting from minor accidents or abra-sion by stones and gravel.

Environmental conditions which accel-erate corrosion1) Road salt, dust control chemicals, sea

air or industrial pollution will all acceler-ate the corrosion of metal.

2) High humidity will increase the rate ofcorrosion particularly when the tem-perature range is just above the freez-ing point.

3) Moisture in certain areas of a vehiclefor an extended period of time may pro-mote corrosion even though other bodysections may be completely dry.

4) High temperatures will cause an accel-erated rate of corrosion to parts of the

vehicle which are not well ventilated topermit quick drying.

This information illustrates the necessity ofkeeping your vehicle (particularly theunderbody) as clean and dry as possible. Itis equally important to repair any damageto the paint or protective coatings as soonas possible.

How to Help Prevent CorrosionWash your vehicle frequentlyThe best way to preserve the finish on yourvehicle and to help avoid corrosion is tokeep it clean with frequent washing.Wash your vehicle at least once during thewinter and once immediately after the win-ter. Keep your vehicle, particularly theunderside, as clean and dry as possible.If you frequently drive on salted roads,your vehicle should be washed at leastonce a month during the winter. If you livenear the ocean, your vehicle should bewashed at least once a month throughoutthe year.For washing instructions, refer to the “Vehi-cle Cleaning” section.

Remove foreign material depositsForeign material such as salts, chemicals,road oil or tar, tree sap, bird droppings andindustrial fall-out may damage the finish ofyour vehicle if it is left on painted surfaces.Remove these types of deposits as quicklyas possible. If these deposits are difficult towash off, an additional cleaner may berequired. Be sure that any cleaner you useis not harmful to painted surfaces and isspecifically intended for your purposes.Follow the manufacturer’s directions whenusing these special cleaners.

Repair finish damageCarefully examine your vehicle for damageto the painted surfaces. Should you findany chips or scratches in the paint, touchthem up immediately to prevent corrosionfrom starting. If the chips or scratches havegone through to the bare metal, have aqualified body shop make the repair.

Keep passenger and luggage compart-ments cleanMoisture, dirt or mud can accumulateunder the floor mats and may cause corro-sion. Occasionally, check under thesemats to ensure that this area is clean anddry. More frequent checks are necessary ifthe vehicle is used off road or in wetweather.Certain cargos such as chemicals, fertiliz-ers, cleaners, salts, etc. are extremely cor-rosive by nature. These products shouldbe transported in sealed containers. If a

9-2

APPEARANCE CARE

82PH0-74E

spill or leak does occur, clean and dry thearea immediately.

Store your vehicle in a dry, well-venti-lated areaDo not park your vehicle in a damp, poorlyventilated area. If you often wash yourvehicle in the garage or if you frequentlydrive it in when wet, your garage may bedamp. The high humidity in the garagemay cause or accelerate corrosion. A wetvehicle may corrode even in a heatedgarage if the ventilation is poor.

Vehicle Cleaning

76G044S

Cleaning the InteriorVinyl upholsteryPrepare a solution of soap or mild deter-gent mixed with warm water. Apply thesolution to the vinyl with a sponge or softcloth and let it soak for a few minutes toloosen dirt.Rub the surface with a clean, damp clothto remove dirt and the soap solution. Ifsome dirt still remains on the surface,repeat this procedure.

Fabric upholsteryRemove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.Using a mild soap solution, rub stainedareas with a clean damp cloth. To removesoap, rub the areas again with a clothdampened with water. Repeat this until thestain is removed, or use a commercial fab-ric cleaner for tougher stains. If you use afabric cleaner, carefully follow the manu-facturer’s instructions and precautions.

Seat beltsClean seat belts with a mild soap andwater. Do not use bleach or dye on thebelts. They may weaken the fabric in thebelts.

WARNINGDo not apply additional undercoatingor rust preventive coating on oraround exhaust system componentssuch as the catalytic converter,exhaust pipes, etc. A fire could bestarted if the undercoating substancebecomes overheated.

WARNINGWhen cleaning the interior or exteriorof the vehicle, NEVER USE flammablesolvents such as lacquer thinners,gasoline, benzene or cleaning materi-als such as bleaches or stronghousehold detergents. The materialscould cause personal injury or dam-age to the vehicle.

9-3

APPEARANCE CARE

82PH0-74E

Vinyl floor matsOrdinary dirt can be removed from vinylwith water or mild soap. Use a brush tohelp loosen dirt. After the dirt is loosened,rinse the mat thoroughly with water anddry it in the shade.

CarpetsRemove dirt and soil as much as possiblewith a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soapsolution, rub stained areas with a cleandamp cloth. To remove soap, rub the areasagain with a cloth dampened with water.Repeat this until the stain is removed, oruse a commercial carpet cleaner fortougher stains. If you use a carpet cleaner,carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc-tions and precautions.

Instrument panel and consoleRemove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.Gently wipe dirt off with a tightly squeezeddamp clean cloth. Repeat this until the dirtis removed.

Cleaning the Exterior

Caring for Aluminum WheelsNOTE:• Do not use an acidic or alkaline deter-

gent to wash aluminum wheels. Thesetypes of detergent will cause permanentspots, discoloration and cracks on fin-ished surfaces.

• Do not use a bristle brush and soap con-taining an abrasive material. These willdamage finished surfaces.

Washing

60B212S

NOTICEDo not use chemical products thatcontain silicon to wipe electricalcomponents such as the air condi-tioning system, audio, navigationsystem, or other switches. These willcause damage to the components.

NOTICEIt is important that your vehicle bekept clean and free from dirt. Failureto keep your vehicle clean may resultin fading of the paint or corrosion tovarious parts of the vehicle body.

WARNING• Never attempt to wash and wax

your vehicle with the engine run-ning.

• When cleaning the underside of thebody and fender, where there maybe sharp-edged parts, you shouldwear gloves and a long-sleevedshirt to protect your hands andarms from being cut.

• After washing your vehicle, care-fully test the brakes before drivingto make sure they have maintainedtheir normal effectiveness.

9-4

APPEARANCE CARE

82PH0-74E

When washing the vehicle, park it wheredirect sunlight does not fall on it and followthe instructions below:1) Flush the underside of body and wheel

housings with pressurized water toremove mud and debris. Use plenty ofwater.

2) Rinse the body to loosen the dirt.Remove dirt and mud from the bodyexterior with running water. You mayuse a soft sponge or brush. Do not usehard materials which can scratch thepaint or plastic. Remember that theheadlight covers or lenses are made ofplastic in many cases.

3) Wash the entire exterior with a milddetergent or car wash soap using asponge or soft cloth. The sponge orcloth should be frequently soaked in thesoap solution.

4) Once the dirt has been completelyremoved, rinse off the detergent withrunning water.

5) After rinsing, wipe off the vehicle bodywith a wet chamois or cloth and allow itto dry in the shade.

6) Check carefully for damage to paintedsurfaces. If there is any damage, touch-up the damage following the procedurebelow:1. Clean all damaged spots and allow

them to dry.2. Stir the paint and touch-up the dam-

aged spots lightly using a smallbrush.

3. Allow the paint to dry completely.

CAUTIONIf your vehicle is equipped with therain-sensing wiper system, place thewiper control lever in the “OFF” posi-tion. If the lever is left in the “AUTO”position, the wipers could unexpect-edly operate and cause an injury, andcould also be damaged.

NOTICEWhen washing the vehicle:• Avoid directing steam or hot water

of more than 80°C (176°F) on plas-tic parts.

• To avoid damaging engine compo-nents, do not use pressurizedwater in the engine compartment.

• To avoid damaging request switch(if equipped), do not use pressur-ized water.

NOTICETo avoid damage to the paint or plas-tic surface, do not wipe the dirt offwithout ample water. Be sure to fol-low above procedure.

NOTICEWhen using a commercial car washproduct, observe the cautions speci-fied by the manufacturer. Never usestrong household detergents orsoaps.

NOTICEIf you use an automatic car wash,make sure that your vehicle’s bodyparts, such as spoilers, cannot bedamaged. If you are in doubt, consultthe car wash operator for advice.

9-5

APPEARANCE CARE

82PH0-74E

Waxing

60B211S

After washing the vehicle, waxing and pol-ishing are recommended to further protectand beautify the paint.• Only use waxes and polishes of good

quality.• When using waxes and polishes,

observe the precautions specified by themanufacturers.

GENERAL INFORMATION

10

82PH0-74E

84MM01001

GENERAL INFORMATIONVehicle Identification .......................................................... 10-1Radio frequency identification (RFID) tag (if equipped) ...................................................... 10-1

10-1

GENERAL INFORMATION

82PH0-74E

Vehicle IdentificationChassis Serial Number

79MH0A01

82PM100001

The chassis and/or engine serial numbersare used to register the vehicle. They are

also used to assist your dealer whenordering or referring to special serviceinformation. Whenever you have occasionto consult your authorised Maruti Suzukiworkshop, remember to identify your vehi-cle with this number. Should you find thenumber difficult to read, you will also find iton the identification plate.

Engine Serial Number

54G082

The engine serial number is stamped onthe cylinder block as shown in the illustra-tion.

Radio frequency identification (RFID) tag (if equipped)As per Ministry of Road Transport andHighways, the Radio frequency identifica-tion (RFID) tag (1) is mandatory for eachvehicle for the purpose of electronic tollcollection or any other purpose as may bedefined by the Government of India.

In case of any damage to RFID tag orreplacement of front windscreen, pleasecontact your nearest authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.

76MH1001

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

(1)

10-2

GENERAL INFORMATION

82PH0-74E

As seen from inside of the vehicle

76MH1002

NOTE:The picture shown is for indicative purpose only. Internal structure of actual device mounted on vehicle may be different.

As seen from outside of the vehicle

76MH1003

NOTE:The picture shown is for indicative purposeonly. Internal structure of actual devicemounted on vehicle may be different. NOTE:• RFID tag needs to be registered by gov-

ernment authorized agency (if applica-ble).

• Any attempt to remove the tag from thewindscreen will result in permanent dam-age to the tag.

• Use of chemical cleaners to clean thewindscreen area where the tag ismounted can damage the tag.

• Use of any sharp objects on the tag candamage the tag.

11-1

SPECIFICATIONS

82PH0-74E

11

SPECIFICATIONSNOTE:Specifications are subject to change without notice.

ITEM: Dimensions UNIT: mmOverall length 3995Overall width 1790Overall height 1640Wheelbase 2500Track Front 1530

Rear 1505

ITEM: Mass (weight) UNIT: kgCurb mass (weight) 1170 - 1195 Gross vehicle mass (weight) rating 1680 Permissible maximum Axle Weight Front 890

Rear 870

11-2

SPECIFICATIONS

82PH0-74E

ITEM: EngineType D13A (DOHC)Number of cylinders 4Bore 69.6 mm Stroke 82.0 mm Piston displacement 1248 cm3

Compression ratio 17.6 : 1

ITEM: ElectricalBattery DIN50LMFFuses See “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.

11-3

SPECIFICATIONS

82PH0-74E

ITEM: Lights WATTAGE BULB No.Headlight High beam 12V 55W H1

Low beam 12V 55W H7Front fog light (if equipped) 12V 24W PSX24WPosition light 12V 5W W5W

LED –Turn signal light Front 12V 21W PY21W

Rear 12V 21W PY21WSide turn signal light 12V 5W WY5W

LED –Brake/tail light Type A 12V 21/5W P21/5WBrake light Type B 12V 21W P21WTail light Type A 12V 5W W5W

Type B LED –High mount stop light LED –Reversing light 12V 16W W16WLicense plate light 12V 5W W5WInterior light Glove box light (if equipped) 12V 1.4W –

Footwell light (if equipped) LED –Vanity mirror light (if equipped) 12V 5W W5WFront (if equipped) 12V 5W W5WCenter 12V 10W –Luggage compartment (if equipped) 12V 5W W5W

11-4

SPECIFICATIONS

82PH0-74E

*1: When tire replacement is necessary and if the specified load index and speed rated tire is not available, then use a tire of higher load index and speed rating.*2: The spare wheel provided with alloy wheel variant is steel wheel rim, hence follow 4 tire rotation only. (Refer: Section “Inspection and

maintenance”)

ITEM: Wheels and TiresTire size 205/60R16 92H*1, 215/60R16 95H*1

Rim size 205/60R16 92H tire: 16 × 6J (Steel)215/60R16 95H tire: 16 × 6 1/2J (Alloy)

Tire pressures For the specified tire pressure, see the Tire Information Label locatedon the driver’s door lock pillar.

Tire size spare/ Rim size spare

For vehicle equipped with 215/60R16

215/60R16*2 (steel wheel)/16 × 6J

For vehicle equipped with 205/60R16

205/60R16*2 (steel wheel)/16 × 6J

ITEM: Recommended Fuel/Lubricants and Capacities (approx.)Fuel See “FUEL RECOMMENDATION” section. 48 L Engine oil Classification: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 5W-30 3.2 L (replacement with oil filter)

Engine coolant See “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” sec-tion. 6.5 L (including reservoir tank)

Manual transaxle oil “MARUTI GENUINE GEAR OIL 75W-80” 2.6 L Brake fluid / Clutch fluid MARUTI GENUINE BRAKE FLUID or

SAE J1703 or DOT3Refill to the proper oil level according to theinstructions in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTE-NANCE” section.

yours sincerely maruti suzuki india limited (pankaj narula · pankaj narula maruti suzuki india...

Documents